Pioneer Stereo System VSX 47TX User Manual

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-47TX  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
Features .................................................6 Displays & Controls ............................27  
Remote Control of Other  
Advanced Setup ..................................88  
Components ........................................62  
Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other  
Components ............................................................... 62  
Recalling Settings Stored in the  
Remote Control .......................................................... 27  
Back Panel .................................................................. 30  
Front Panel ................................................................. 32  
Display ........................................................................ 34  
Assigning the Digital Inputs...................................... 88  
Assigning the Component Video Inputs .................. 89  
Expert Setup............................................................... 90  
OSD (On-screen Display) ADJUSTMENT ........... 91  
BASS PEAK LEVEL ............................................... 92  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL .............................. 93  
MULTI CH IN SELECT ........................................... 94  
FUNCTION RENAME ............................................ 95  
THX Audio Setup ....................................................... 96  
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Setup .............................. 96  
Surround Back Speaker Position......................... 97  
Re-Equalization ..................................................... 98  
Before You Start ....................................7  
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................... 7  
Preparing the Remote Control .................................... 7  
Loading the batteries ............................................. 7  
Remote Control Battery Indicator ......................... 7  
Operating range of remote control unit ............... 8  
Installing the Receiver ................................................. 8  
Opening the Front Panel ............................................. 8  
Remote Control..................................................... 62  
Programming Signals from Other Remote  
Setting Up for Surround Sound ........35  
Controls (LEARNING Mode) ................................ 64  
Using Remote Control with Other Components ..... 66  
CD/MD/VCR/DVD/LD/DVD Recorder and Cassette  
Deck operations .................................................... 66  
Cable TV/Satellite TV/ Digital TV/ TV operations 67  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION ........................... 68  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS ................................................. 36  
CHANNEL DELAY ..................................................... 38  
CHANNEL LEVEL ...................................................... 39  
Acoustic Calibration EQ ............................................ 41  
Check the Auto Settings ............................................ 42  
Quick Start Guide Part 1.......................9  
Home Theater: The Basics .......................................... 9  
Your Home System................................................. 9  
The Source Material ............................................... 9  
The Listening Modes .............................................. 9  
Conclusion .............................................................. 9  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV ..................... 10  
Digital Connections .............................................. 10  
2 Speaker Connections ........................................... 11  
3 Setting up the Main Unit...................................... 12  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs ................................ 12  
Basic Operation ...................................43  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback ........................... 43  
Switching the channels used for playback  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving ....99  
Using Other Functions........................69  
Dolby........................................................................... 99  
Dolby Digital ......................................................... 99  
Dolby Pro Logic II ................................................. 99  
Dolby Digital Surround EX ................................ 100  
DTS ........................................................................... 100  
DTS ...................................................................... 100  
DTS-ES ................................................................ 100  
DTS Neo:6 ........................................................... 100  
DTS 96/24 ............................................................ 100  
THX ........................................................................... 100  
Speaker Placement Information ............................. 102  
Audio Block Diagram............................................... 104  
Troubleshooting ....................................................... 105  
Specifications ........................................................... 111  
Recording from Audio or Video Components......... 69  
Speaker System B Setup........................................... 70  
Stereo playback in another room........................ 70  
Bi-amping the front speakers .............................. 70  
Bi-wiring your speakers ....................................... 70  
Switching A/B Speaker System ........................... 71  
Connecting Additional Amplifiers ............................ 72  
Pre Out Power Setup ................................................. 73  
Using an separate stereo pre-amplifier .............. 73  
Using a separate power amplifier for  
main room stereo sound ..................................... 73  
Multi-Room ................................................................ 74  
MULTI-ROOM connections .................................. 74  
MULTI-ROOM setup ............................................. 75  
Controlling the MULTI-ROOM system from the  
main room............................................................. 76  
Controlling the MULTI-ROOM system from the  
sub room ............................................................... 77  
The PIONEER SR System: Operating other PIONEER  
components ............................................................... 78  
Multi Operations ........................................................ 79  
Performing multi operations ............................... 80  
System off .................................................................. 81  
Using System off .................................................. 82  
Editing Remote Control Display Names .................. 83  
Editing Buttons Names (KEY LABEL) ....................... 84  
Adjusting the Light on the Remote control ............. 85  
Clearing Remote Control Settings You Have Input . 86  
Resetting the Main Unit ............................................ 87  
(LISTENING CH SELECT) ..................................... 44  
Switching ANALOG/DIGITAL Signal Input ......... 45  
Playback of 96kHz 24 bit sound formats ............. 45  
Listening Modes ........................................................ 46  
STEREO modes..................................................... 46  
STANDARD modes ............................................... 46  
HOME THX modes ............................................... 47  
ADVANCED CINEMA modes................................ 48  
ADVANCED CONCERT modes ............................. 49  
Adjusting the Effect of Advanced Listening Modes ... 49  
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ ................... 50  
Reducing Noise During Playback  
(DIGITAL NR Function) .............................................. 50  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode................................... 51  
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode ................................. 51  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (Tone Control) ............... 52  
DVD Audio/MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback .............. 53  
DUAL MONO setting and Playback .......................... 54  
Input Attenuator......................................................... 54  
Tape 2 Monitor ........................................................... 54  
Using the Headphones .............................................. 55  
Video Select ............................................................... 55  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display .................. 56  
Status Display ............................................................ 56  
Quick Start Guide Part 2.....................13  
1 Auto Surround Sound Setup ............................... 13  
2 Playing a DVD with Surround Sound ................. 15  
3 Personalizing Your Sound.................................... 15  
Connecting Your Equipment ..............16  
Connecting your TV ................................................... 16  
Component Video Input Default Settings........... 16  
Connecting Video Components................................ 17  
Connecting a DVD, DVD/LD or LD player ........... 17  
Connecting VCRs or DVDs ................................... 18  
Connecting a Video Component  
to the Front Panel ................................................. 18  
Connecting Satellite TV Components ................. 19  
Connecting Analog Audio Components .................. 20  
Cassette deck placement ..................................... 21  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs  
(DVD-A or Super Audio CD compatible player)... 21  
Connecting Digital Audio Components ................... 22  
Digital Input Default Settings .............................. 23  
Connecting the Radio Antennas ............................... 24  
Using outdoor antennas ...................................... 24  
Connecting Speakers................................................. 25  
Placing Your Speakers ............................................... 26  
Speaker placement ............................................... 26  
AC Power Cord........................................................... 26  
AC Outlet [switched 100w max] ............................... 26  
Using the Tuner ...................................57  
Automatic and Manual Tuning ................................. 57  
MPX Mode ............................................................ 57  
Direct Access Tuning ................................................. 58  
Memorizing Frequently Used Stations .................... 59  
Naming Memorized Stations .................................... 60  
Recalling Memorized Stations .................................. 61  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
Features .................................................6 Displays & Controls ............................27  
Remote Control of Other  
Advanced Setup ..................................88  
Components ........................................62  
Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other  
Components ............................................................... 62  
Recalling Settings Stored in the  
Remote Control .......................................................... 27  
Back Panel .................................................................. 30  
Front Panel ................................................................. 32  
Display ........................................................................ 34  
Assigning the Digital Inputs...................................... 88  
Assigning the Component Video Inputs .................. 89  
Expert Setup............................................................... 90  
OSD (On-screen Display) ADJUSTMENT ........... 91  
BASS PEAK LEVEL ............................................... 92  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL .............................. 93  
MULTI CH IN SELECT ........................................... 94  
FUNCTION RENAME ............................................ 95  
THX Audio Setup ....................................................... 96  
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Setup .............................. 96  
Surround Back Speaker Position......................... 97  
Re-Equalization ..................................................... 98  
Before You Start ....................................7  
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................... 7  
Preparing the Remote Control .................................... 7  
Loading the batteries ............................................. 7  
Remote Control Battery Indicator ......................... 7  
Operating range of remote control unit ............... 8  
Installing the Receiver ................................................. 8  
Opening the Front Panel ............................................. 8  
Remote Control..................................................... 62  
Programming Signals from Other Remote  
Setting Up for Surround Sound ........35  
Controls (LEARNING Mode) ................................ 64  
Using Remote Control with Other Components ..... 66  
CD/MD/VCR/DVD/LD/DVD Recorder and Cassette  
Deck operations .................................................... 66  
Cable TV/Satellite TV/ Digital TV/ TV operations 67  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION ........................... 68  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS ................................................. 36  
CHANNEL DELAY ..................................................... 38  
CHANNEL LEVEL ...................................................... 39  
Acoustic Calibration EQ ............................................ 41  
Check the Auto Settings ............................................ 42  
Quick Start Guide Part 1.......................9  
Home Theater: The Basics .......................................... 9  
Your Home System................................................. 9  
The Source Material ............................................... 9  
The Listening Modes .............................................. 9  
Conclusion .............................................................. 9  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV ..................... 10  
Digital Connections .............................................. 10  
2 Speaker Connections ........................................... 11  
3 Setting up the Main Unit...................................... 12  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs ................................ 12  
Basic Operation ...................................43  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback ........................... 43  
Switching the channels used for playback  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving ....99  
Using Other Functions........................69  
Dolby........................................................................... 99  
Dolby Digital ......................................................... 99  
Dolby Pro Logic II ................................................. 99  
Dolby Digital Surround EX ................................ 100  
DTS ........................................................................... 100  
DTS ...................................................................... 100  
DTS-ES ................................................................ 100  
DTS Neo:6 ........................................................... 100  
DTS 96/24 ............................................................ 100  
THX ........................................................................... 100  
Speaker Placement Information ............................. 102  
Audio Block Diagram............................................... 104  
Troubleshooting ....................................................... 105  
Specifications ........................................................... 111  
Recording from Audio or Video Components......... 69  
Speaker System B Setup........................................... 70  
Stereo playback in another room........................ 70  
Bi-amping the front speakers .............................. 70  
Bi-wiring your speakers ....................................... 70  
Switching A/B Speaker System ........................... 71  
Connecting Additional Amplifiers ............................ 72  
Pre Out Power Setup ................................................. 73  
Using an separate stereo pre-amplifier .............. 73  
Using a separate power amplifier for  
main room stereo sound ..................................... 73  
Multi-Room ................................................................ 74  
MULTI-ROOM connections .................................. 74  
MULTI-ROOM setup ............................................. 75  
Controlling the MULTI-ROOM system from the  
main room............................................................. 76  
Controlling the MULTI-ROOM system from the  
sub room ............................................................... 77  
The PIONEER SR System: Operating other PIONEER  
components ............................................................... 78  
Multi Operations ........................................................ 79  
Performing multi operations ............................... 80  
System off .................................................................. 81  
Using System off .................................................. 82  
Editing Remote Control Display Names .................. 83  
Editing Buttons Names (KEY LABEL) ....................... 84  
Adjusting the Light on the Remote control ............. 85  
Clearing Remote Control Settings You Have Input . 86  
Resetting the Main Unit ............................................ 87  
(LISTENING CH SELECT) ..................................... 44  
Switching ANALOG/DIGITAL Signal Input ......... 45  
Playback of 96kHz 24 bit sound formats ............. 45  
Listening Modes ........................................................ 46  
STEREO modes..................................................... 46  
STANDARD modes ............................................... 46  
HOME THX modes ............................................... 47  
ADVANCED CINEMA modes................................ 48  
ADVANCED CONCERT modes ............................. 49  
Adjusting the Effect of Advanced Listening Modes ... 49  
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ ................... 50  
Reducing Noise During Playback  
(DIGITAL NR Function) .............................................. 50  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode................................... 51  
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode ................................. 51  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (Tone Control) ............... 52  
DVD Audio/MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback .............. 53  
DUAL MONO setting and Playback .......................... 54  
Input Attenuator......................................................... 54  
Tape 2 Monitor ........................................................... 54  
Using the Headphones .............................................. 55  
Video Select ............................................................... 55  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display .................. 56  
Status Display ............................................................ 56  
Quick Start Guide Part 2.....................13  
1 Auto Surround Sound Setup ............................... 13  
2 Playing a DVD with Surround Sound ................. 15  
3 Personalizing Your Sound.................................... 15  
Connecting Your Equipment ..............16  
Connecting your TV ................................................... 16  
Component Video Input Default Settings........... 16  
Connecting Video Components................................ 17  
Connecting a DVD, DVD/LD or LD player ........... 17  
Connecting VCRs or DVDs ................................... 18  
Connecting a Video Component  
to the Front Panel ................................................. 18  
Connecting Satellite TV Components ................. 19  
Connecting Analog Audio Components .................. 20  
Cassette deck placement ..................................... 21  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs  
(DVD-A or Super Audio CD compatible player)... 21  
Connecting Digital Audio Components ................... 22  
Digital Input Default Settings .............................. 23  
Connecting the Radio Antennas ............................... 24  
Using outdoor antennas ...................................... 24  
Connecting Speakers................................................. 25  
Placing Your Speakers ............................................... 26  
Speaker placement ............................................... 26  
AC Power Cord........................................................... 26  
AC Outlet [switched 100w max] ............................... 26  
Using the Tuner ...................................57  
Automatic and Manual Tuning ................................. 57  
MPX Mode ............................................................ 57  
Direct Access Tuning ................................................. 58  
Memorizing Frequently Used Stations .................... 59  
Naming Memorized Stations .................................... 60  
Recalling Memorized Stations .................................. 61  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Advanced Multichannel Stereophonic Concept  
The VSX-47TX receiver is constructed with Pioneer’s industry-leading advanced multichannel stereophonic  
concept. This means it is designed to reproduce music and movie soundtracks as close as possible to the  
intentions of the producer during mastering. The receiver uses a revolutionary 3-D Frame Construction  
technique and a Symmetrical Power Train Design, with high-performance Advanced Direct Energy MOS-FET  
output devices, generating 160 watts (FTC, 6) of power for 7 independent channels. True 32-bit Twin Digital  
Signal Processing is used for ultra realistic sound.  
Multi-Channel Acoustic Calibration System (MCACC)  
In order to make setting up as easy as possible for users we have created the MCACC system. This unique and  
convenient way of getting good surround sound from the receiver makes trouble-free set up a snap. With the  
microphone equipped remote control plugged into the front panel with the remote control cable the MCACC  
system creates a monitoring environment to establish the parameters of the sound for the specific room you are  
using. The MCACC system adjusts the parameters to establish excellent surround sound effects and offer you  
the best in home theater for the minimum of effort.  
Universal Player Compatibility (DVD Audio)  
This receiver incorporates the latest technology and is able to handle cutting edge audio formats, like DVD Audio  
and 96 kHz/24 bit processing which are just hitting the market. Its high compatibility offers a variety of inputs to  
decode all types of sources at the highest possible quality. The receiver’s multichannel input connections lets you  
hook up eight discrete channels of audio. It also has multichannel direct inputs and the ability to decode the  
cutting edge formats.  
Next Generation THX Standards and New Digital Formats  
The VSX-47TX is the first receiver in the world to be THX Ultra2 certified. Among the new THX technologies is  
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array), which can process any 5.1 channel source for 7.1 channel playback (THX Ultra2  
Cinema and THX MusicMode), or 6.1 channel playback (THX Surround EX). THX Surround EX technology makes  
possible true playback of Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks. The VSX-47TX is also among the first  
generation of products able to play discs that feature high quality DTS 96/24 soundtracks. Naturally, you can also  
play all existing audio formats, including the recently developed Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS-ES Extended  
Surround formats. On the video side, the component video output is fully compatible with high definition,  
progressive-scan digital video (720p).  
Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered  
trademarkes of Lucasfilm Ltd. & TM. Surround EX  
is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby  
Laboratories and is a trademark of Dolby  
Laboratories. All rights reserved. Used under  
authorization.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby 2 Pro Logic Surround EX”, and double-D  
symbol 2 are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
"DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround" and "Neo:6" are  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Advanced Cinema & Advanced Concert Modes  
The Advanced Cinema and Advanced Concert modes applied to movie soundtracks and music deliver a range of  
digital effects, giving you a wide range of listening possibilities.  
LCD Illumination Remote Control  
This self-illuminating remote control simplifies operation even in a darkened home theater room. Preset codes  
for other equipment and a learning function make it possible to use the remote control to operate products from  
other manufacturers. The full range of receiver functions can be controlled using the remote. A microphone is  
equipped for use for auto surround sound setup.  
The Energy-saving Design  
This unit is designed to use 0.65 W of energy when the receiver is in standby mode.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Start  
Checking the Supplied Accessories  
Please check that you have received all of the following supplied accessories.  
“AA” IEC LR6  
batteries x 4  
FM wire Antenna  
AM Loop Antenna  
AC Power Cord  
Remote Control  
Cable for Auto  
Surround Sound Setup  
Remote Control  
Stand for Auto  
Surround Sound Setup  
U-shaped  
connectors x 2  
(attached to back of  
receiver)  
Remote Control Unit  
Operating Instructions  
Preparing the Remote Control  
Loading the batteries  
Load the batteries into the remote control as shown below. Please use alkaline batteries. When you notice a  
decrease in the operating range, replace all batteries with new ones.  
1
2
3
AAIEC LR6  
batteries x 4  
CAUTION!  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions.  
Never use new and old batteries together.  
Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutions  
rules that apply in your country or area.  
Remote Control Battery Indicator  
When the batteries get too weak to operate the remote control properly an  
indicator warning screen will appear on the remote. Change the batteries as  
shown above. This must be done within five minutes or all your remote control  
settings will be cleared.  
Shows when the  
batteries are getting weak  
SETUP  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Start  
Operating range of remote control unit  
The area in which you can use the remote control to operate the VSX-47TX is fairly large. To use, point the  
remote control toward the remote sensor on the front panel of this unit while within the range shown below.  
Remote control may not function properly if:  
There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the remote sensor.  
Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
The receiver located near a device emitting infrared  
rays.  
Operated simultaneously with another remote control  
which uses infrared rays.  
30  
30  
S
0
U
R
C
E
S
E
T
U
DV  
D/  
LD  
P
T
V
V
C
M
U
D
V
R
S
Y
1
R
/
L
T
S
T
T
V
C
I
E
D
C
O
F
F
M
DIMMER  
V
O
C
N
R
T
2
R
S
A
M
VI  
1
C
O
A
D
TA  
D
L
T
P
EO  
-R  
SE  
IN  
P
E1  
/
V
ID  
5
L
PUT  
TO  
A
E
TV  
N
SIGN  
2
TT  
T
O
C
O
E
U
SYSTEM  
M
S
9
NT  
A
L
LOUDNESSN  
BA  
6
SEL  
E
R
OP  
ER UL  
AT TI  
IO  
M
SS  
E
ETU  
/T  
DI  
N
U
3
N
P
1
R
EB  
TA  
PE  
AB  
SPEAKER A/  
0
LE  
M
P
STATUS  
0
2
G
7
U
EF  
F
ID  
E
ECT  
4
MPX  
RECT  
1
ACC1  
+
1
/CH  
TU  
E
0
8
SEL  
NIN  
N
T
ES  
G
E
R
S
+
L
1
1
STAT  
REM  
D
O
IS  
2
D
IS  
P
M
C
RF  
A
TE  
ODE  
CHANN  
4IO  
EL  
N
SET  
TT  
8
U
P
B
AN  
D
EXI  
T
RN  
3
RE  
TU  
T
CLASS  
V
V
TV  
EX  
T
RA  
O
7
L
TV  
IN  
23 feet (7m)  
C
PU  
TUNING  
M
EN  
O
T
N
U
TR  
¡
T
O
L
STAT  
+
T
V
IN  
P
H
X
C
U
¢
CHANNE  
ION  
H
AD  
T
+
V
A
SU  
R
M
C
I
N
IDN  
IG  
E
M
N
C
ED  
R
S
A
OU  
ND  
TA  
H
L
+
ACO  
ND  
T
C
A
U
S
A
RD  
D
IG  
N
IT  
L
TI  
C
ADV  
R
A
V
O
(
D
V
D
-
A
/
C
O
N
A
N
L
L
CE CE  
RT  
S
U
D
/
TE  
IR  
M
MU  
LI  
STE  
M
D
R
IN LTI  
PU  
T
SACD)  
E
C
EO  
T
E
C
H
N
AV  
OD ING  
E
P
M
UT  
RE  
-P  
RO  
LIS  
CH  
T
EN  
S
E
I
N
E
RE  
G
L
M
O
RA  
EC  
T
G
TE  
M
M
C
E
L
A
ON  
TR  
D
IG  
X
AN  
H
T
D
72  
D
O
9
L
U
LE  
A
0
N
IT  
R
N
IN  
Î
G
Installing the Receiver  
CAUTION!  
Do not cover this unit in any way, for exam-  
ple with a sheet or piece of cloth. This would  
prevent proper heat dispersal.  
Do not any place object directly on top of  
this unit. This also would prevent proper heat  
dispersal.  
Be sure to leave adequate ventilation space  
around the amp! When installing in a rack,  
shelf, etc., be sure to leave more than 8  
inches of space above the receiver.  
8 inches (20 cm)  
Receiver  
Opening the Front Panel  
To open the front panel push gently on the lower third of the panel with your finger.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide Part1  
Home Theater: The Basics  
Mostconsumersareusedtousingstereoequipmenttolistentomusicbutmanypeoplearenotusedtohometheater  
systemsthatgiveyoumanymoreoptionswhenlisteningtosoundtracks.Infact,hometheaterisnotreally  
complicatedandthislittleguideshouldgiveyouanunderstandingofthebasics.  
Themainreasonwhyitseemssodifficultisthattherearethreedifferentfactorsinvolvedinhometheaterandeach  
willcontributetowhatkindofsoundyouget.  
Thesefactorsare:  
1)Theequipmentyouareusingforyourhometheatersetup.Particularlyimportantisthenumberofspeakersyouare  
using.Wecallthisyourspeakerconfiguration.  
2)The'source'materialyouareusing.Thisistheactualproduct(likeaDVD)orbroadcast(likecableTV)youare  
listeningto/watching. Wecallthisthesource.  
3)ThelastfactoristhelisteningmodeyouchooseontheVSX-47TXreceiver.Theseareexplainedbelowandin  
subsequentchaptersbutmostlikelytheSTANDARD(default)settingwillbefine.  
Let'sstartwiththehometheatersetupyouhaveinyourhome.  
1) Your Home System  
TheheartofyoursystemistheVSX-47TXreceiveranditisveryflexibleingettingyoutheater-likesurroundsound.You  
canusethisreceiverwithanywherefromtwotosevenspeakers(frontleft,frontright,center,surroundleftandright,  
andsurroundbackleftandright)andasubwoofertogethometheatersurroundsound.Werecommendyouuseseven  
speakersandasubwoofer.Ifthisisnotpossiblefollowtheinstructionsin"AutoSurroundSetup"inthe"QuickStart  
Guide"andyouwillbeabletogetgoodsurroundsound.Also,aDVDplayerisessentialforhometheaterandyoucan  
alsohookupsatelliteorcableTVtunertothisreceiverandgetamorehometheater-likesoundfromthesesources.  
2) The Source Material  
DVDshavebecomethebasicsourcematerialforhometheaterbecausetheyofferexcellentsoundandpicturequality,  
andallowuserstoenjoyhometheatersoundtrackswithmorethantwochannelsofaudio.Forexample,DolbyPro  
Logicplaysbackfourchannels(frontleft,frontright,centerandasinglechannelforbothsurroundspeakers),Dolby  
DigitalandDTSsourcesusuallyhavesixdiscretechannels(frontleft,frontright,center,surroundleftandrightanda  
channelthatpowersthesubwoofer)ofsound.Sincethesubwooferchannelisonlyforbasssounds,thismultichannel  
setuphasbeennamed5.1channelsound.  
ItisimportantyouconsultthemanualthatcamewithyourDVDplayeraswelltomakesuretheplayerisoutputtinga  
surroundsoundtrackandalltheothersettingsareappropriateforyourhometheater.  
3) The Listening Modes  
Thisreceiverhasmanydifferentlisteningmodesandtheyaredesignedtocoverallthespeakerconfigurationsand  
typesofsourcesyoumightbeusing.Ingeneral,ifyoufollowtherecommendedadviceandhavesevenspeakersanda  
subwooferhookedup,inmostcasestheSTANDARDlisteningmodeistheeasiestwaytogetrealistichometheater  
sound.Thisisthedefaultsettingsoyoudon'thavetodoanything.  
TolistentomusicinstereosimplychoosetheSTEREOlisteningmode.Otherpossibilities(likelisteningtoastereoCD  
withallsevenspeakersortakingastereosourceandgettingmultichannelhometheater-likesound)areexplainedin  
listeningmodes(pages46–49).  
Conclusion  
Thesearethethreebasicfactorsthatcontributetoyourhometheatersound.Theeasiestthingistohookupseven  
speakersandasubwooferandsimplyplayyourDVDswithSTANDARD7.1mode.Thiswillgiveyourealisticand  
enjoyablehometheatersound.Firsthookupyourequipment,likeyourDVDplayer,TVandspeakers.Thenfollowthe  
instructionstosetupyoursystemforsurroundsound.Itisveryimportantyoudooneofthesurroundsoundsetupsto  
getoptimalsoundfromyourreceiver.  
Formoredetailsonanyoftheinformationpresentedherecheckthemainsectionofthemanual.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide Part1  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV  
In order to use Dolby Digital/DTS soundtracks which are at the heart of home theater you need to hook up your  
DVD player with digital audio connections. You can do this by either a coaxial or an optical connection, you don’t  
need to do both. The quality of these two types of connections is the same but since some DVD players only  
have one type of digital terminal you need to figure out which yours has and hook it up to the appropriate  
terminal on the receiver. In order to do this you will need the proper cable. For coaxial connections you can use a  
regular RCA video cord or the specially-made coaxial cords, they have the same type of plugs. For optical  
connections you will need a special optical cable which you can buy at your local stereo store. For more  
information on cords and cables see page 23. You should also hook up your DVD player with analog audio  
connections. Use regular RCA stereo cords for these connections. Also hook up the video connection on your  
DVD player, and your TV to this receiver. For your TV it's easiest to use a regular composite (RCA) video cord, as  
shown below. It is important that you hook up your TV (or monitor) in order to see a video image as well as the  
on screen displays (OSDs) shown by this receiver (for more on this see p.16).  
Digital Connections  
Some DVD players have both coaxial and optical terminals, but there is is no need to connect both. If your DVD  
player has a coaxial terminal (not a PCM-only output) for the audio out hook it up using this terminal. Follow the  
diagram below. This is the best scenario, as you will be able to follow the default settings of this receiver and  
won't need to assign the digital inputs (you should use DIGITAL IN 1).  
If your DVD player only has an optical terminal for the audio output you can hook it up using one of the DIGITAL  
IN terminals between 3-5 (for example, DIGITAL IN 3). In this case, you will need to assign the digital input  
(which means tell the receiver which input you used for your DVD digital audio). See page 12 for this.  
RCA stereo cord  
RCA video cord  
ANALOG  
STEREO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
DVD player  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(CD)  
IN  
IN  
2
1
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OUT  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
IN  
ROOM  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
RCA video cord  
DVD  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
/LD  
IN  
Y
Y
AUDIO  
1
(DVD  
/LD)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
P
B
R
P
B
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
P
P
R
(not a PCM-only  
output)  
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
4
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
R
P
P
B
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
P
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGN
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
2RF  
IN  
(DVD  
/LD)  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
You only need to make  
one DIGITAL connection.  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
BACK  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
coaxial cord  
optical cord  
VIDEO INPUT  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide Part1  
2 Speaker Connections  
Home theater is designed to be setup with five, or seven speakers (front left & right; center; surround left &  
right; and, optimally, surround back left & right) and a subwoofer, but you can use this receiver with fewer  
speakers. Hook up the speakers you have to the A speaker terminals on the back of the receiver. If you only  
have two speakers hook them up as "FRONT." If you have three hook up the single speaker as "CENTER." Follow  
the diagram below in order to hook up all your speakers. A center speaker is very important for watching films  
because in digital soundtracks the dialog comes from the center speaker. If you do not have a center speaker  
you must tell the receiver the center channel is off or when you listen to digital soundtracks you won't hear any  
dialog. This can be done automatically by following the Auto Surround Sound Setup instructions from page 13 in  
this Quick Start Guide.  
If possible, use surround back speakers. These speakers are important to take full advantage of all the sound  
channels on new, eight channel home theater DVDs. The diagram below also explains how to hook up a  
subwoofer which provides realistic bass sounds. For the subwoofer use a mono (single plug) RCA cord and for  
the other speakers use regular speaker cords. See page 102103 for advice on speaker placement.  
Make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the R terminal and the speaker on the left to the L terminal.  
Also make sure the positive and negative (+/) terminals on the receiver match those on the speakers.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Front  
speaker  
(Left)  
Front  
speaker  
(Right)  
TV/monitor  
Center  
speaker  
INPUT  
CONTROL  
Å
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OUT  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
AC OUTLET  
REMOTE IN  
Surround  
speaker  
(Left)  
L
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
IN  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
AUDIO  
FRONT  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
ANTENNA  
Surround  
speaker  
(Right)  
Y
R
Y
AUDIO  
1
75FUMNBAL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
P
B
R
P
B
R
R
L
CENTER  
FRONT  
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
P
P
R
L
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
4
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
AC IN  
L
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
SUR-  
ROUND  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
R
P
B
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
R
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
SELECTABLE  
L
P
P
ı
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
(Single)  
L
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
SUR-  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
R
R
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
Surround back  
speaker (Left)  
Surround back  
speaker (Right)  
Please use speakers with a nominal impedance rated 6-16.  
If you only have one surround back speaker hook it up to the left surround back terminal.  
memo  
If you use a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer  
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
When you attached your speaker wire to the speaker terminal make sure that not even one strand  
of wire touches the back of the receiver. If this happens it could short out the receiver.  
7 Speaker terminals  
The speaker terminals also  
accept single banana plugs.  
(Refer to speaker manual for  
details.)  
2 Loosen speaker terminal  
3 Tighten  
1 Twist exposed wire  
and insert exposed wire.  
terminal.  
strands together  
tightly.  
3/8 in(10mm)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide Part1  
3 Setting up the Main Unit  
1 Connect the supplied AC power cord to the back of the main unit and plug the  
other end into a wall outlet (don't use any other power cord than the one that  
came with this receiver).  
2 Press the POWER ON/OFF button to put the receiver in ON mode.  
3 Press the STANDBY/ON button to switch the receiver ON.  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs  
This is only necessary if you did not hook up your DVD player to DIGITAL IN 1 using a coaxial cable but  
rather connected it to one of the optical digital inputs. The following example shows how to assign the  
DIGITAL IN 3 jack to DVD.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
SETUP  
press the RECEIVER button on the  
remote control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
The SYSTEM SETUP menu appears on your TV (if it  
doesn't, refer to page 12 to make sure you have  
properly connected the receiver to your TV).  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
2
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
3~8  
RETURN  
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
System Setup  
3
4
5
[ Auto Surround Setup ]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup]  
[3. Expert Setup]  
4 DIGITAL IN-SELECT should be  
selected, if not use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER button.  
[4. THX Audio Setup]  
[Exit]  
5 The default setting for the DIGITAL-3  
jack is SAT.  
1.Input Assign  
[ 1.Digital-In Select ]  
[ 2.C' nent Vudeo In ]  
[Return]  
6 Use the 2 3 buttons to select DVD/  
LD.  
7 Select EXIT with the 5∞ buttons  
and press ENTER.  
1.1. Digital-In Select  
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
Digital-5  
[DVD/LD]  
CD  
SAT  
VCR1  
CD-R  
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu.  
RF IN  
[DVD/LD]  
8 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER.  
The receiver exits the setup process.  
[Return]  
1.1. Digital-In Select  
6
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
Digital-5  
[
[
OFF  
CD  
]
]
[DVD/LD]  
[
[
VCR1  
CD-R  
]
]
RF IN  
[DVD/LD]  
[Return]  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide Part2  
1 Auto Surround Sound Setup  
If setting up your surround sound speakers seems like it's going to be an involved task you only need to  
use this quick, automatic method to achieve good surround sound. You'll need to hook up the remote  
control, which has a microphone in it, so that the receiver can hear and judge the distance, size, sound  
character and sound pressure level of the speakers and thus know what settings to make.  
First turn the volume down, then plug the cord provided into the remote control (as shown in A below) and  
then plug the cord into the SETUP MIC jack on the front panel of the receiver (as shown in B below). Don't  
plug in the other way around.  
Follow the step-by-step guide to setting up your surround sound below. This will customize the surround  
sound for your listening environment. After you get used to the system it is a good idea to make more  
advanced settings as explained in "Expert Setup" (page 90). Also, if you want to personalize your surround  
sound setups by making the settings manually go to "Setting up for Surround Sound" (starting on page  
35). Make sure all the components you need, especially speakers, have been properly connected before  
you do the steps described here. Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the remote  
control to navigate the on-screen display (OSD) on your TV.  
TOR  
MASTER VOLUM  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
Make sure your TV is set to this receiver as you will  
use the on-screen displays (OSDs) on your TV to  
follow these instructions.  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
B
MIC  
SETUP  
SETUP  
R
E
IV  
2 Hook up the remote control to the  
SETUP MIC jack on the Front Panel.  
E
C
E
R
M
E
T
S
Y
S
F
F
V
T
O
T
N
N
S0URCE  
TV  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
AMP  
O
C
E
D
TV  
C
R
U
O
S
T
A
S
T
I
L
U
O
M
TI  
A
R
E
P
O
R
V
L
T
O
R
O
E
DVD/LD  
TV  
SAT  
TV CONT  
T
N
2
ID  
R
O
V
E
V
/L  
I
C
C
I
E
D
T
EC  
MULTI CONTROL  
V
L
U
D
R
/B  
M
A
VCR1/  
MULTI  
V
R
R
E
E
K
A
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
N
E
U
P
T
S
VCR1/  
DVR  
S
S
E
4 S  
L
N
E
D
U
CD-R/  
APE1  
O
H
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
L
/C  
T
T
CD  
TUNER  
AMP  
C
T
FE  
T
F
E
A
3
T
U
D
C
P
2
8DIS  
C
IN  
E
P
A
T
R
2EL  
E
+
M
IM  
D
S
L
7
+
R
E
T
A
0
S
E
T
N
1
IG  
N
S
D
E
1
S
E
M
P
L
P
U
E
S
6
I
D
S
O
E
E
E
L
T
ID  
EB  
S
O
V
R
E
M
C
/T  
C
E
S
A
R
S
T
A
C
5
B
E
IR  
D
E
N
0
O
T
9
M
X
T
E
P
U
T
N
U
E
S
R
U
T
E
E
R
T
E
T
R
S
Y
S
U
N
N
E
E
E
I
T
M
D
3 Place the remote control at your  
normal listening position.  
R
E
N
E
N
U
M
T
A
R
T
X
E
F
S
U
/O  
G
T
N
IN  
A
O
T
N
U
S
V
T
D
T
E
ID  
U
G
D
N
N
MPX  
A
IO  
B
T
A
T
S
S
S
A
L
E
L
C
G
IN  
U
N
N
N
A
H
U
E
T
M
C
Y
T
D
N
IO  
T
A
A
T
T
S
U
P
E
M
IN  
U
L
O
L
E
T
L
V
N
U
P
O
N
A
IN  
T
H
V
C
T
T
R
I
GH  
N
N
ID  
O
M
C
V
T
L
A
IT  
N
H
IG  
C
D
R
L
O
V
V
T
E
T
V
U
T
M
O
C
Use a table, chair or something else to put the  
microphone at the same height as you usually listen  
to your system from.  
E
R
E
E
T
T
/D  
S
IR  
G
G
N
IN  
E
I
N
E
D
D
N
A
T
T
S
IS  
L
O
M
D
T
X
N
H
D
H
U
E
I
G
L
T
O
C
R
D
N
T
R
A
R
U
V
E
S
AD  
C
NG  
N
)
I
O
D
E
N
C
D
C
CT  
ST  
L
E
A
LI  
C
/S  
SE  
E
N
-A  
N
A
N
A
C
V
V
(D  
H
D
EM  
C
T
A
I
C
L
IN  
T
P
U
U
M
IC  
T
S
U
O
C
C
AL  
A
4 If you have a subwoofer turn it on.  
SETUP  
5 Press RECEIVER button on the  
remote control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
TV  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
5
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
6 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button  
and use the on-screen display (OSD)  
that appears on your TV.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+10  
+
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
6
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
7~12  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
7 The arrow should be pointing at  
AUTO SURROUND SETUP, press  
ENTER.  
System Setup  
7
[ Auto Surround Setup ]  
[1. Input Assign]  
[2. Surround Setup]  
[3. Expert Setup]  
[4. THX Audio Setup]  
8 NORMAL SURROUND should be  
selected. (Use the 2 3 buttons to  
select it if it isn't.) Use the 5∞  
buttons to select GO NEXT and  
press ENTER.  
[Exit]  
1.Auto Surround Setup  
Speaker System Select  
8
For Bi-amp settings choose FRONT BI-AMP 5.1 and  
follow the directions from step 3 on page 37.  
[
Normal Surround  
]
[Next]  
[Return]  
RETURN brings you back to the system setup menu.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide Part2  
9 Some auto setup instructions will be  
listed, make sure to follow them.  
1. Auto Surround Setup  
Make sure you have: hooked up the remote control  
microphone and moved obstacles to the speakers out of  
the way. If you have a subwoofer make sure it is turned  
on and has the volume turned up.  
10  
Connect microphone  
Please be quiet  
Move obstacles away  
If you have  
a
subwoofer  
turn power on and  
turn volume up  
WARNING: The test tones are very loud!! Make sure  
there are no infants or small children in the room and  
that no one who will be scared, upset or injured by loud  
noise is present. You yourself may want to wear ear-  
plugs. It is possible to lower the volume of test tones,  
but this could result in incorrect speaker settings.  
[Start]  
[Cancel]  
1. Auto Surround Setup  
Please Wait  
10 If you have followed all setup  
instructions and warnings above make  
sure that the arrow is pointed to  
START and press ENTER. Put the  
remote control into the its stand and  
be prepared for loud test tones.  
Caution!!  
Test tone is  
output loudly.  
[Cancel]  
Auto Surround Setup  
Try to be as quiet as possible after hitting ENTER. The  
test tones may take up to 30 seconds.  
•••  
Now Analyzing  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
The volume automatically increases to 0dB, then the  
system will output some test tones and establish  
ambient noise levels, the microphone status, and what  
speakers you hooked up.  
Speaker Level  
[Cancel]  
11 Check the speaker settings on the OSD  
If they match your speaker configuration make sure  
OK,GO NEXT is selected and press ENTER. Put the  
1. Auto Surround Setup  
11  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
[ YES ]  
[ YES ]  
[ YES ]  
[
NO  
]
Subwoofer [ NO  
]
remote control into the its stand again. The test tones  
will be output loudly again. The test tones may take up  
to 5 minutes this time.  
[OK]  
[Retry]  
[ERR Fix SP.]  
[Return to Menu]  
After it has finished, you see the SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS CHECK screen. If you want to view the  
settings select NEXT and press ENTER repeatedly. If  
not, simply go to step 13.  
Auto Surround Setup  
•••  
Now Analyzing  
Surround Analysis  
Speaker Systems  
Channel Delay  
Channel Level  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
If they do not match the speaker configuration you  
hooked up and you wan to try again select RETRY with  
5∞ buttons and press ENTER. Put the remote control  
[Cancel]  
into the its stand again. Follow the instructions above  
from step 10.  
Speaker Systems Check  
Normal Surround  
If the speaker settings do not match the speaker  
configuration you connected and you want to input the  
settings manually select ERR=FIX SP with the 5∞  
buttons, press ENTER. Put the remote control into the  
its stand again. and go to step 12.  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
X
[SMALL 2]  
[
YES  
]
)
[Next]  
(
Back/Next  
[Return]  
If you see an ERR message in the right side column,  
there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If  
selecting RETRY doesn't fix the problem, turn off the  
power and check the speaker connections.  
12 Use the ∞5 buttons to select a speaker  
then the 2 3 buttons to select the size  
of each speaker individually.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide Part2  
memo  
Use the ∞5 buttons to select OK,  
GO NEXT and press ENTER. Put the  
remote control into the its stand.  
The system will output another series of test tones to  
establish the proper channel level, channel delay and  
acoustic calibration EQ. Again, be prepared for loud  
test tones.  
Make sure the room environment follows the  
guidelines displayed on the OSD during auto  
setup. If the room environment is not optimal  
for auto setup (too much ambient noise,  
obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone on the remote control, etc.) the  
final settings may be incorrect. Check for  
household appliances (air conditioner, fridge,  
fan, etc.) that may be affecting the  
environment and switch them off if necessary.  
Screens will turn off after three minutes and  
the receiver will automatically exit from the  
setup process.  
If you leave CHECK!! or other error message  
on the screen for three minutes, or you  
choose CANCEL at anytime during the setup,  
the settings made up to that point will be  
cleared.  
After completing the Auto Surround Sound  
Setup, ACOUSTIC CAL EQ ON (ALL CH ADJ)  
is set automatically.  
After it has finished, you see the SPEAKER  
SYSTEMS CHECK screen. If you want to view the  
settings select NEXT and press ENTER repeatedly.  
If not, simply go to the next step.  
13 Select RETURN to go back to the  
SYSTEM SETUP menu, then choose  
EXIT to complete the auto surround  
sound setup and return to normal  
use.  
You should now have settings that will give you  
good surround sound. The MCACC indicator will  
light and the surround sound settings are com-  
plete.  
2 Playing a DVD with Surround Sound  
1 Make sure the receiver, your TV, and your DVD player are switched ON.  
2 Press the DVD/LD button on the remote control.  
You should see "DVD/LD" in the display on the receiver.  
3 Press the LISTENING CH SELECT button on the remote control  
repeatedly until you see "7.1" in the display on the receiver.  
4 Press the STANDARD button on the remote control for the basic  
surround sound setting.  
5 Play a DVD then adjust the MASTER VOLUME.  
3 Personalizing Your Sound  
1 Use the Surround Listening Mode buttons to find the listening mode(s)  
that work best for the source material.  
For more information see pages 4649.  
2 To get a more refined sound, make the sound settings in "Expert  
Setup" (p.90-95).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting your TV  
Connect your TV to the jacks as shown below. Hook up with either component video, S video, or compos-  
ite video cords (the quality descends in this order) but you must use the same type of video cords to  
hook up your DVD player (and all other video components) as you use to hook up your TV. Com-  
posite video cords, which look just like regular RCA audio cords (see p.20) but have only one cable and  
connector, are the most common.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
0UT  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
ROOM  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
Y
TV/monitor  
Y
AUDIO  
1
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
PB  
P
B
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
P
R
P
R
R
L
TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
VIDEO IN  
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
R
P
P
B
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
Y
P
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
S-VIDEO  
PB  
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
R
L
L
PR  
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
BACK  
L (Single)  
R
R
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
S Video  
Component video  
S video cables produce  
The video signal is  
clearer picture reproduction  
by sending separate signals  
for the luminance and the  
color. These jacks are  
labeled by the Japanese  
designation "S2" on the  
VSX-47TX but they are  
simply S video jacks.  
S VIDEO  
divided into the  
Y
luminance (Y) signal and  
the color (PB and PR)  
signals. In this way,  
interference between  
the signals is avoided.  
Green  
Blue  
PB  
PR  
Red  
Composite Video  
Composite video cords are the most common or standard video cord but also  
the loest quality. The color on the connector is yellow to distinguish it from  
regular RCA audio cords which have white and red connectors (see p.20). It is  
important to use a true composite video cord and not an audio cord (though  
they look exactly the same) because the impedance is different and this will  
affect the picture quality.  
Component Video Input Default Settings  
If you use component video cords to hook up your video equipment it is easiest to do so following the  
default settings, which are listed below. Remember you must use component video cords from your  
video source (for example, a DVD player) to the receiver and from the receiver to your TV (or monitor). If  
you don't follow the default settings below you must assign the inputs you used with the "Assigning the  
Component Video Inputs" procedure. See page 89 to do this.  
The default settings are:  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1: DVD/LD  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2: TV  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 : SAT  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Video Components  
Connect your video components as shown on this and the following page. For video components (for  
example, a DVD player) there are two types of connections to make, video and audio.  
Hook up your video signal with either component video, S video or composite video cords (the quality  
descends in this order) but you must use the same type of cord as you used to hook up your TV.  
For the audio signal, in order to use digital soundtracks like Dolby Digital or DTS you must hook up a digital  
input, with either a coaxial or optical cord (see p.22 & 23). It is also a good idea to hook up your  
components with analog audio connections as well, since some DVDs may not output a digital audio  
track. A DVD/LD player or LD player requires a specialized 2 RF connection (shown at the very top of the  
first diagram below) to cover the all possible soundtracks on laser discs.  
If you want to record from your DVD player composite (or S video) cord connections and analog audio  
connections are necessary.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connecting a DVD, DVD/LD or LD player  
Hook up your audio signal with either a coaxial or optical digital cords (you don't need to do both). For  
DVD/LD or LD players, if your player has a 2 RF output hook up the 2 RF connection as well (with a  
coaxial cord). This will ensure you can use all LDs (see below & p.22). If you hook up your DVD/LD player  
using component video cable connections you might need to setup your DVD player for component video  
output as well. See your DVD manual for details. If you have a DVD-A or Super Audio CD compatible  
player, see "Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs" on page 21.  
You need to hook up your audio with analog connections as well.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
2
(LD)  
RF OUT  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the signal.  
LD player only  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
IN  
OUT  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
1
2
OUT  
ROOM  
&
ROOM  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
(not a PCM-only output)  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
Y
3
Y
AUDIO  
1
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
PWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
P
B
R
P
B
R
R
L
FRO
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
P
P
R
IN  
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
VIDEO  
Y
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
Y
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB .  
3
IN  
PE OUT  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
DVD/LD player  
or LD player  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
P
B
(Single)  
SUR
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
S-VIDEO  
PR  
P
B
P
R
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
PR  
R
L
ADIO  
VIDEO  
S
VDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
L (Single)  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
ANALOG  
STEREO  
R
R
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
L
R
memo  
• If your digital connections are different than the default settings you will need to assign  
the digital jacks to the proper component(s) with the "Assigning the Digital Inputs"  
procedure. See page 88 to do this.  
• If your component video connections are different from the default settings, you will  
need to assign them with "Assigning the Component Video Inputs". See page 89 for how  
to do this.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting VCRs or DVRs  
Connect the video out of your VCR/DVR using either S video or composite video cords, depending on how  
you connected the receiver to your TV (see p.16). Use analog audio cords for the audio signal. To record,  
you also need to connect a set of audio/video outputs from the receiver to the audio/video inputs on your  
VCR/DVR. Note that to record video from a source component, the video connection from the source to  
the receiver and from the receiver to the recorder must be the same type.  
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
(REC)  
AUDIO  
(PLAY)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
L
L
ROOM  
&
OUT  
IN  
ROOM  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
R
R
Y
Y
AUDIO  
1
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
PB  
P
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
VCR 1/DVR  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
PR  
P
R
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
P
B
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
P
PR  
R
P
IN  
OUT  
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
AUDIO  
(REC)  
AUDIO  
(PLAY)  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
L
R
L
R
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VCR 2  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
Connecting a Video Component to the Front Panel  
Connect a portable DVD player, video game console or any video component to the front panel as show  
here. Front video connections are accessed via the front panel input selector as "VIDEO."  
TUNER  
STATION  
CH
(5
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
CLASS  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
COLOR  
BRIGHT  
MONITOR  
VIDEO-IN/OUT  
AUDIO-IN/OUT  
PHONES  
ON/OFF  
HOLD  
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)  
Be careful! For portable DVD players you will need a  
specialized optical cord (for the audio) that has a mini  
optical plug on one end and a regular optical plug on  
the other.  
You cannot assign the name of the digital input on the front panel. It will always  
appear as "VIDEO" in the receiver's display. See page 88 for more information on  
"Assigning the Digital Inputs".  
memo  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Satellite TV (SAT) Components  
Hook up the video signal with either component video, S video, or composite video cords, depending on  
how you connected the receiver to your TV (see p.16).  
For the audio signal, in order to use digital soundtracks broadcast you must hook up a digital input. Use  
either a coaxial or optical cable, it doesn't matter which (see p.22-23). We recommend hooking up your  
audio with analog cables as well (see below).  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the TV signal.  
VIDEO  
CONTROL  
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
Y
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
IN  
ROOM  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
PB  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
Y
Y
AUDIO  
1
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
PR  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
PB  
P
B
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
Satellite tuner  
IN  
IN  
P
R
P
R
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
2
3
ANALOG  
STEREO  
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
2
P
B
R
P
P
B
R
ngle)  
L
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
P
R
L
APE2  
MONITOR  
R
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
FRONT  
UB W.  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
BACK  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
VIDEO  
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
Y
S-VIDEO  
P
B
R
P
TV tuner  
ANALOG  
STEREO  
L
R
If your component video connections are different from the default settings, you will  
need to assign them with "Assigning the Component Video Inputs". See page 89 for how  
to do this.  
memo  
If your digital connections are different than the default settings you will need to assign  
the digital jacks to the proper component(s) with the "Assigning the Digital Inputs"  
procedure. See page 88 to do this.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Analog Audio Components  
Connect your audio components to the jacks as shown below. These are all analog connections and your  
analog audio components (turntable, cassette deck) use these jacks. Remember that for components you  
want to record with you need to hook up four plugs (a set of stereo ins and a set of stereo outs), but for  
components that only play (like a turntable) you only need to hook up one set of stereo plugs (two plugs).  
If you want to record to/from digital components (like a CD-R) to/from analog components you must hook  
up your digital equipment with these analog connections.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the audio signal.  
ANALOG  
OUTPUT  
L
R
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
CD player  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
AUDIO  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
Turntable  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
nge
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
If your turntable has a  
ground wire, connect it to  
the SIGNAL GND terminal.  
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
ANALOG  
R
L
L
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
(REC)  
(PLAY)  
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
L
L
IN  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
R
R
Recorder 1 (CD-R/TAPE/MD)  
Recorder 2 (CD-R/TAPE/MD)  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
(REC)  
(PLAY)  
L
L
R
R
Don't hook up any other component to  
the PHONO jacks other than a  
turntable. It could damage the  
equipment. If your turntable has a  
phono pre-amplifier (most do not)  
please hook it up to an input other  
than PHONO.  
memo  
7 Audio cords  
Use (RCA) audio cords (not supplied) to con-  
nect the audio components.  
Connect red plugs to  
R (right) and white  
L
plugs to L (left).  
Be sure to insert  
completely.  
R
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Cassette deck placement  
Depending on where the cassette deck is placed, noise may occur during playback of your cassette deck  
which is caused by leakage flux from the transformer in the receiver. If you experience noise, move the  
cassette deck farther away from the receiver.  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs (DVD-A or Super Audio  
CD compatible player)  
If you have a DVD-A or Super Audio CD compatible player, or are using an external Dolby Digital/DTS  
decoder, connect it to the multichannel analog inputs as shown below. Note that if your DVD-A, Super  
Audio CD compatible player or decoder which doesn't have surround back outputs, it is possible to create  
a 7 channel environment with the "MULTI CH IN SELECT" feature on page 94.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
Components equipped with  
7.1 (5.1) channel analog output jack  
ANALOG  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
AUDIO  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
FRONT  
SURR-  
SUB  
SURR-  
DIGITAL  
CENTER  
OUND  
WOOFER  
OUND BACK  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
L
L
L
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
R
R
R
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
(Sie)  
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
BACK  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
memo  
If you use only one surround back input hook up the left one.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Digital Audio Components  
Connect your digital components as shown below. The VSX-47TX has two coaxial, three optical and one  
2 RF inputs for a total of six digital inputs. In order to use digital soundtracks like Dolby Digital or DTS  
(among others) you need to make digital audio connections. You can do this by either a coaxial or an  
optical connection (you don’t need to do both). The quality of these two types of connections is the same  
but since some digital components only have one type of digital terminal, it is a matter of matching like  
with like (for example, the coaxial out from the component to coaxial in on the receiver). A DVD/LD player  
or LD player should also be connected to the special 2 RF jack (if the LD has one).  
Hook up your digital equipment in accordance with this receiver's default settings (see next page) unless  
you want to, or need to, change them. To do this see "Assigning the Digital Inputs" on p.88 .  
There are two optical digital out jacks (the CD recorder is connected to one in the diagram below). If you  
connect this to the optical input on a digital recorder (currently these include MD, DAT and CD-R) you can  
make direct digital recordings with this unit.  
We also recommend hooking up your digital components to analog audio jacks (see p.20) in order to make  
recordings (some digital sources may be protected against making digital copies).  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the audio signal.  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
OUT  
IN  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
R
&
OUT  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL  
CD  
IN  
CD recorder  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
Satellite tuner  
(Single)  
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
CD player  
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
OUTPUT  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
DVD player  
(not a PCM-only output)  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
7 Coaxial cords/Optical cables  
Commercially available digital audio coaxial  
cords (standard video cords can also be used) or  
optical cables (not supplied) are used to connect  
digital components to this receiver.  
Coaxial cord  
(or standard [composite]  
video cord)  
Optical cable  
Be sure to insert completely and in the case of  
the optical cable, right-side up. If it is inserted  
improperly it can break the shutter on the  
optical terminal (this won't, however, affect the  
connection or insertion of an optical cable).  
Digital Input Default Settings  
Unlike analog connections, the jacks for digital connections are not dedicated to one type of component,  
they can be used freely. Thus you must tell the receiver what digital component is connected to which  
jack so your components will be in sync with the names on the remote control buttons and the like. To  
avoid having to assign the digital inputs you can hook up your equipment in accordance with the receiver's  
default settings.  
The default settings are:  
DIGITAL IN 1 (coaxial): DVD/LD  
DIGITAL IN 2 (coaxial): CD  
DIGITAL IN 3 (optical): SAT  
DIGITAL IN 4 (optical): VCR1/DVR  
DIGITAL IN 5 (optical): CD-R/TAPE 1/MD  
2 RF IN (coaxial): DVD/LD  
See "Assigning the Digital Inputs" on p.88 if the way you hook up your equipment is different from the  
default settings listed here.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting the Radio Antennas  
Connect the supplied FM wire antenna and the AM loop antenna to the ANTENNA terminals as shown  
below. These antennas should provide adequate reception quality in most cases, but connecting outdoor  
antennas should noticeably improve sound quality.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
FM wire  
AM loop  
antenna  
antenna  
·
ª
CONTROL  
Å
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
OUT  
IN  
L
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
AC OUTLET  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
OUT  
IN  
ROOM  
&
ROOM  
&
FRONT  
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
R
L
1
OUT  
PHONO  
IN  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
Y
R
ANTENNA  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUDIO  
1
DIGITAL  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
75FUMNBAL  
TV  
IN  
IN  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
P
B
R
P
B
R
CENTER  
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
FRONT  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
P
L
P
R
L
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
IN  
IN  
3
AC IN  
OUT  
OUT  
L
IN  
2
CD-R/  
Y
Y
VCR1  
SUR-  
7 AM loop antenna  
2 Twist exposed wire strands  
3 Attach to a wall, etc. (if  
desired) and face toward  
the direction providing  
the best reception.  
1 Assemble the antenna.  
together and insert.  
3/8 in. (10 mm)  
Using outdoor antennas  
7 To improve FM reception  
Connect an external FM antenna.  
7 To improve AM reception  
Connect a 15 to 18 feet (5 6 meter) length of vinyl-coated  
wire to the AM LOOP ANTENNA terminal in addition to the  
supplied AM loop antenna.  
For best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.  
One touch  
F connector  
AM loop antenna  
Outdoor antenna  
15–18 ft (5–6 m.)  
Indoor antanna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
75 coaxial cable  
ANTENNA  
75FUMNBAL  
Ground  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Connecting Speakers  
We recommend a full complement of seven speakers and a subwoofer as shown here but, naturally,  
everyone's home setup will vary. Simply connect the speakers you have in the manner described below.  
The VSX-47TX will work with just two stereo speakers (called "front" speakers in the diagram) but it is  
desirable to have at least three speakers (two "front" speakers and a "center" speaker).  
One of the latest features of home theater is the use of surround back speakers. These speakers add  
even greater realism in movie sound effects and some new discs with soundtracks in Dolby Digital or DTS  
incorporate these channels. See the next page for speaker placement.  
In general, make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the R terminal and the speaker on the left  
to the L terminal. Also make sure the positive and negative (+/) terminals on the receiver match those on  
the speakers.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
If you only have one surround back speaker hook it up to the left surround back terminal.  
The VSX-47TX has two speaker systems, A & B. If you are planning on setting up another  
set of speakers (speaker system B), refer to "Speaker System B Setup" on page 70.  
memo  
If you use a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your  
subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Front  
speaker  
(Left)  
Front  
speaker  
(Right)  
TV/monitor  
Use Speakers with a  
nominal impedance  
rated 6to 16.  
Center  
speaker  
INPUT  
CONTROL  
Å
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OUT  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
AC OUTLET  
REMOTE IN  
Surround  
speaker  
(Left)  
L
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
IN  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
AUDIO  
FRONT  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
ANTENNA  
Surround  
speaker  
(Right)  
Y
R
Y
AUDIO  
1
75FUMNBAL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
P
B
R
P
B
R
R
L
CENTER  
FRONT  
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
P
P
R
L
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
4
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
AC IN  
L
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
SUR-  
ROUND  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
R
P
P
B
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
R
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
SELECTABLE  
L
P
ı
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
(Single)  
L
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
SUR-  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
R
R
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
Surround back  
speaker (Left)  
Surround back  
speaker (Right)  
7 Speaker terminals  
The speaker terminals also  
accept single banana plugs.  
(Refer to speaker manual  
for details.)  
2 Loosen speaker terminal  
3 Tighten  
1 Twist exposed wire  
strands tightly  
together.  
and insert exposed wire.  
terminal.  
3/8 in(10mm)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipment  
Placing Your Speakers  
Proper speaker placement is essential to realize the best sound from your system. The diagram and tips  
given here are just a rough guide, for more information see page 102 & 103. Also, it is very important for  
speaker placement to read the instructions that come with your speakers so please be sure to do so.  
Speaker placement  
If you have a multiple speaker arrangement the placement of the speakers is extremely important. To  
achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below. Make sure all speakers  
are installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality. Some speakers are designed to be  
floor-standing but others benefit greatly from speaker stands which raise them off the floor. Be sure to  
read your speaker manuals for the best placement of the speakers.  
When installing speakers near the  
memo  
Center Speaker  
TV, we recommend using  
magnetically shielded speakers to  
prevent distortion in the color of  
the TV screen. If you do not have  
magnetically shielded speakers  
and notice discoloration of the TV  
screen, place the speakers farther  
away from the TV.  
Front Speaker  
(L)  
Front Speaker  
(R)  
Subwoofer  
Install the center speaker above or  
below the TV so that the sound of  
the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen.  
Surround  
Speaker (L)  
Surround  
Speaker (R)  
THX recommends that if you have  
two surround back speakers place  
them close together. Then you can  
take advantage of the ASA feature  
(see p.97,101).  
Surround Back  
Speaker (L)  
Surround Back  
Speaker (R)  
See page 102 & 103 for more  
detailed advice on speaker  
placement.  
CAUTION:  
When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with suitable means.  
AC Power Cord  
Plug in the power cord first to the receiver and then to the wall outlet after you have finished hooking up  
the rest of your equipment.  
CAUTION!  
Don't use any other power cord than the one supplied with this unit.  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in  
regular use, e.g. when on vacation.  
AC Outlet [switched 100 w max]  
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by this units STANDBY/ON button. Total electrical  
power consumption of connected equipment should not exceed 100 W.  
CAUTION!  
Do not connect appliances with high power consumption such as heaters, irons, or television sets to the  
AC OUTLET in order to avoid overheating or fire risk. This can cause the amplifier to malfunction.  
DO NOT CONNECT A MONITOR OR TV SET TO THIS UNITS AC OUTLET.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Remote Control  
This page describes the buttons on the remote control used to operate the receiver.  
4 Number buttons  
These can be used for many purposes depend-  
1
SETUP  
ing on the mode of the remote control. When  
the in receiver mode the buttons operate as  
below:  
!
@
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2
3
Display DIMMER (see p.56)  
Use to adjust the brightness of the receiver's  
display.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
#
$
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT ATT. button (see p.54)  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
Use to lower the input level of an analog signal  
that is too powerful, thus causing the receiver  
to distort. In this case the OVER (overload)  
indicator will be flashing furiously.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
4
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
5
6
7
%
^
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
LOUDNESS button (see p.51)  
Switches the LOUDNESS mode on or off (for  
all modes except THX and MULTI CH IN).  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
8
SPEAKER A/B button (see p.71)  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
Use to select the speaker system. A is the  
primary setting. The button cycles through the  
speaker systems as follows: A]B]A&B]off.  
Different conditions apply when bi-amping the  
speakers. For this case refer to page 71.  
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
&
*
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
9
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
(
)
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
0
-
LISTENING  
MODE  
VIDEO SELECT button (see p.55)  
Use to toggle between the different video input  
possibilities.  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
_
Î
=
~
SIGNAL SELECT button (see p.45)  
Press SIGNAL SELECT repeatedly to select one of  
the following:  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
ANALOG: To select an analog signal.  
DIGITAL: To select a digital signal  
2 RF: To select a 2 RF signal  
AUTO: This is the default. If there are analog,  
digital and 2 RF signals input, the receiver  
automatically selects the 2 RF signal. If there are  
analog and digital signals input, the digital will be  
selected.  
1 Remote Control Display Screen  
2 SOURCE button  
Use this button to turn off other components. You  
must input the preset code in order to use this  
function (see page 62-63).  
TV button  
This is a dedicated TV button. Use it to turn on/off  
your TV.  
3 MULTI CONTROL buttons  
These buttons are the basic controls that switch  
the mode of the receiver and the remote control,  
which allows you to control your other  
components.  
TV CONT: Press so that the remote control can  
operate the TV control commands.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
TAPE 2 MONITOR button (see p.54)  
Selects the tape deck (or MD recorder, etc.)  
connected to the TAPE 2 MONITOR inputs/  
outputs. Allows monitoring of a recording as  
it's being made.  
9 TV CONTROL buttons  
The following buttons are used to control the TV  
only and can be used once they are preset to  
control your TV.  
TV INPUT: Press to select the input source for the  
TV.  
TV CH +/– : Use these buttons to change the  
channel of the TV.  
TV VOL +/– : Press to control the volume of the  
TV.  
EFFECT/CH SEL. button  
Switches between all channels and EFFECT in  
ADVANCED mode. You can then use the +and  
– buttons to adjust the sound.  
TONE buttons  
0 LISTENING MODE buttons (see p.43-44)  
STEREO/DIRECT: Switches the receiver into  
STEREO mode if it was in a different listening  
mode or toggles between DIRECT and STE-  
REO mode (see p.46).  
This button has two functions. Firstly, it  
switches between TONE on and TONE bypass,  
which goes around the tone circuitry. Secondly,  
you need to press this button before using the  
BASS & TREBLE buttons.  
THX: Press to put the receiver into Home THX  
listening mode (see p.47).  
STANDARD: Press to put the receiver into  
STANDARD listening mode (see p.46).  
ADVANCED CINEMA: Press to put the  
receiver into ADVANCED CINEMA listening  
mode (see p.48).  
ADVANCED CONCERT: Press to put the  
receiver into ADVANCED CONCERT listening  
mode (see p.49).  
BASS/TREBLE buttons (see p.52)  
Use to choose the high or low frequencies to  
adjust.  
(+/–) buttons  
Use to adjust the high and low frequencies,  
effect level and channel level.  
5 SYSTEM SET UP button  
Use for all system setups, including the speaker  
and sound systems. For more information see .  
“Setting up for Surround Sound“ starting on p.35.  
For other components this button will give you the  
base or top menu.  
- ACOUSTIC CAL. button (see p.41, 50)  
Press to switch on/off and select the type of  
acoustic calibration EQ.  
= MULTI CH INPUT button (see p.53, 94)  
Use this button to select the component (for  
example, a DVD-Audio player) you have hooked  
up to the MULTI CH INPUT terminals.  
6 5˜∞˜2˜3˜ENTER buttons  
These buttons can be used for a variety of  
operations in the SYSTEM SETUP menu.  
These buttons are used to control the menus for  
other components when in those modes (DVD,  
digital TV tuner, satellite tuner, cable tuner, etc.). In  
TUNER mode, they can select a station and/or a  
frequency.  
~ LISTENING CH SELECT. (see p.44)  
Use this button to select a listening channel  
(5.1, 7.1, AUTO).  
7 STATUS button see p.56)  
! SYSTEM OFF button (see p.81)  
This button turns off components in two ways.  
First, when pressed it will turn off all PIONEER  
components. Secondly, any component that  
has programmed into the SYSTEM OFF  
settings will be turned off.  
Use to display the present mode the receiver is  
in and another settings. For a digital TV tuner  
this button will call up the GUIDE menu.  
8 Command button for other components  
(see p.66-67)  
For example : If you programmed power off in  
the SYSTEM OFF settings for your TV and VCR,  
pressing the SYSTEM OFF button will turn off  
these components even if they are not  
PIONEER products.  
Use these buttons to control other components  
you selected with the MULTI CONTROL  
buttons. You must input the preset code in  
order use this function (see page 62-63).  
@
RECEIVER (standby/power on) button  
Press to turn power of the receiver on or to  
standby (off).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
# MULTI OPERATION button  
Use this button to start the MULTI OPERATION  
mode. See p.79-80 for how to program and use  
the MULTI OPERATION mode.  
$ RECEIVER button  
Use this button to switch the remote control  
into receiver mode in order to get certain  
receiver functions or do receiver setups.  
% REMOTE SETUP button.  
Use to customize the remote control functions  
and the remote control itself. (See Setting Up  
Remote Control of Other Componentsstarting  
on p.62).  
^ EXIT button  
When you are in a receiver setup operation this  
button will exit from SYSTEM SETUP proce-  
dures. When you are using your DVD menu  
screen this button acts the same as the DVD  
player's "Return" button. When you are using  
cable tuners, satellite tuners or digital TV tuners  
this button will either exit you from the menu  
screen or act like a "Return" button above,  
depending on the maker of the unit.  
& INPUT button  
Press to select an input source. The button will  
cycle through all the possible sources.  
* VOLUME (+/) buttons  
Use to raise or lower the volume of the receiver.  
( MIDNIGHT button (see p.51)  
Switches the MIDNIGHT listening mode on or  
off (for all modes except THX and MULTI CH  
IN).  
DIGITAL NR button (see p.50)  
Switches the DIGITAL NR on or off (for all  
modes except THX and MULTI CH IN).  
) MUTE button  
Press to mute or restore the volume.  
_ LIGHT button  
Use to light the remote control display and  
buttons.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Back Panel  
All the terminals on the back panel are explained and/or referenced here.  
1
4 5 6 9 10 11  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
OUT  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
AUDIO  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
5: U-shaped  
connectors  
Don't remove the U-  
shaped connectors  
unless you plan to  
connect an external  
amp to this receiver.  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
PRE OUT  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
(Single)  
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
L (Single)  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
R
R
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
2
3
7
8
1 DIGITAL OUT terminals (see p.22)  
5 U-shaped connectors  
Use these terminals to output the signal from a  
DVD, CD player or any other kind of digital  
player.  
6 POWER AMP IN terminals (see p.73)  
Use this terminal to connect an external power  
amp to this receiver. Remove the U-shaped  
connectors only if you plan to do so.  
2 DIGITAL IN terminals (see p.22)  
Use these terminals to input the signal from a  
DVD, CD player or any other kind of digital  
player. To be able to play Dolby Digital and  
other surround soundtracks you need to make  
digital connections. To do this use the digital  
terminals here. If you don't connect as per the  
default settings (see p.23) you need to com-  
plete "Assigning the Digital Inputs" (see p.84).  
7 PRE OUT analog terminals (connect an  
amplifier here, see p.72, 73)  
Use these terminals to output the audio signal  
from this amplifier to a different amplifier if  
that's how you choose to set up your system.  
Remove the U-shaped connectors only if you  
plan to do so.  
8 Video components in/out terminals  
Input/output signals from you video compo-  
nents (DVD, VCR, TV tuners, SAT tuners, etc.)  
here. (see number 2 here and p.17-19).  
3 MULTI CH INPUT terminals (see p.21)  
Use these terminals to input a multichannel  
surround signal (for example, a DVD-Audio  
signal) in an analog fashion. These are analog  
jacks.  
9 MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE OUT  
terminals (see p.74-78).  
4 Analog input/output terminals  
(connect analog components here, see  
p.20)  
These terminals output the audio & video signal  
to a sub-system in a secondary room. These  
are analog jacks.  
Use these terminals to input/output the audio  
signal from analog components (like a cassette  
deck or turntable). These are analog jacks.  
10 CONTROL IN/OUT terminal  
You can use this jack to hook up other PIO-  
NEER equipment, that bears the Î mark, so  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
12 15  
18  
Å
AC OUTLET  
REMOTE IN  
L
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
FRONT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
ANTENNA  
Y
R
Y
1
75FUMNBAL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
P
B
P
B
R
CENTER  
PR  
P
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
2
3
AC IN  
L
Y
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
P
B
P
B
R
R
SELECTABLE  
PR  
P
ı
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
(Single)  
L
L
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
R
13 14  
16  
17  
that you can control them all pointing the  
remote control(s) at one remote sensor.  
14 RS-232C Connection  
This is a future-oriented port that has the possibil-  
ity on inputting and/or outputting information to/  
from the receiver in the future.  
11 MONITOR OUT terminals (connect a TV  
or monitor here, see p.16)  
15 Radio antenna terminals  
Hook up antennas for the radio tuner built into  
the receiver here.  
Use these terminals to output a video signal to  
a TV or monitor.  
12 MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE REMOTE IN  
terminals  
16 SPEAKERS terminals (see p.25)  
Use these terminals to connect speakers to the  
receiver. There are two speaker systems on  
this receiver A & B. The A system is the one  
that handles surround sound and is fed by the  
surround and surround rear speakers. If you  
want to use alternative connections like bi-  
amping and bi-wiring see page 70.  
Use these terminals to hook up a sub-system in  
a secondary room. This hook up requires a  
separately sold IR receiver and allows you to  
use the receiver to hear different audio sources  
in different rooms.  
13 COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals (see  
p.16-17)  
17 AC IN (Power In)  
Use these terminals to hook up the video  
connections of your video components with  
this high quality method. Your components will  
have to have the terminals as well to take  
advantage of this kind of connection. If you use  
these terminals you need to complete "Assign-  
ing the Component Video Inputs" (see p.89).  
Hook up the power cord to this terminal.  
18 AC OUTLET  
Hook up an external component to the power  
supply of this receiver. Only do this with audio  
or video components being used in this system  
and never hook up heavy equipment (like TVs,  
heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, etc.) to  
this receiver.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Front Panel  
All the controls on the front panel are explained and/or referenced here. To open the front panel push  
gently on the lower third of the panel.  
7
1
2 3  
4
5
6
8
9 10  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER  
LISTENING MODE SELECTOR  
VSX-47TX  
STANDBY/ON  
MULTI  
ROOM  
STANDBY  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
TAPE1/MD  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
VCR  
VCR2  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
OFF  
ON  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MASTER VOLUME  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
MIDNIGHT  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
13  
15  
17  
11  
12  
14  
16  
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
LISTENING MULTI ROOM  
CH SELECT  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
MIDNIGHT  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
25  
18 19 20 21 22 23  
24  
1 INPUT SELECTOR dial  
6 MCACC indicator (see p.14-15, 35-41)  
Lights when the ACOUSTIC CAL EQ is on.  
(After the Auto Surround Sound Setup has  
been completed the ACOUSTIC CAL EQ is set  
on and this display will light.)  
Turn to select a source component. (You can  
also use to select a source in the MULTI-  
ROOM & SOURCE mode.) The input indicators  
show the current component.  
2
STANDBY/ON buttonpower ON/  
OFF button  
Press to switch the receiver ON or into  
STANDBY mode or switch OFF.  
7 MULTI-ROOM indicator (see p.77 & 78)  
Shows whether the multi-room function is  
active or not.  
8 INPUT indicators  
3 STANDBY indicator  
Shows which source component is selected.  
The MULTI CH INPUT indicator lights up when  
a component connected to the MULTI CH  
INPUT is selected.  
Lights when the receiver is in STANDBY mode.  
(Please note that this receiver consumes a  
small amount of power [0.65 W] in the standby  
mode.)  
9 LISTENING MODE SELECTOR dial (see  
p.44)  
4 Remote sensor  
Receives the signals from the remote control.  
Turn and push to select a listening mode.  
5 Display (See p.34)  
10 MASTER VOLUME dial  
Adjusts the overall receiver volume.  
11 ACOUSTIC CAL. button (see p.50)  
Use to switch on and off the Acoustic Calibra-  
tion EQ.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
12 MIDNIGHT button (see p.51)  
Use to switch the receiver into MIDNIGHT  
mode.  
20 SIGNAL SELECT button (see p.45)  
Use to select the type of signal being input into  
the receiver. Press SIGNAL SELECT repeatedly  
to select one of the following:  
13 TONE control buttons  
ANALOG To select an analog signal.  
TONE button  
DIGITAL To select an optical or coaxial digital  
signal.  
This button switches between TONE ON and  
TONE BYPASS, which bypasses the tone  
circuitry.  
2 RF To select a 2 RF signal.  
AUTO This is the default. If there are analog,  
digital and 2 RF signals input, the receiver  
automatically selects the 2 RF signal. If there  
are analog and digital signals input, the digital  
will be selected.  
BASS/TREBLE button (see p.52)  
Use to select whether the bass or treble will be  
adjusted.  
(/+) buttons (see p.52)  
Use to adjust the frequency levels.  
21 VIDEO SELECT button  
Switches the receiver between the various  
types of video input.  
14 DIGITAL NR button (see p.50)  
Switches the DIGITAL NR on or off (cannot be  
used in THX or MULTI CH IN modes).  
22 TAPE 2 MONITOR button  
Selects the tape deck (or CD-R, etc.) connected  
to the TAPE 2 MONITOR inputs/outputs.  
Allows monitoring of a recording as it's being  
made.  
15 TUNER control buttons (see p.57-61)  
CLASS button  
Press repeatedly to switch the preset station  
classes.  
(/+) buttons  
Use to choose programmed radio stations.  
23 MULTI CH INPUT button  
Selects the component (for example, a DVD-  
Audio player) you have hooked up to the MULTI  
CH INPUT terminals.  
16 LISTENING CH SELECT button (see  
p.44)  
Use this button to select the number of  
channels used for playback (5.1, 7.1 or AUTO).  
24 SET UP MIC jack (see p.13)  
Plug in the set up mic (the remote control)  
here. This is very important for setting up your  
system to get proper surround sound.  
17 MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE button (see  
p.74-78)  
Press to use the multi room feature (requires  
an optional PIONEER Multi-Room Remote  
Sensor Unit MR-100 or another IR receiver).  
25 Front VIDEO INPUT jacks (see p.18)  
DIGITAL IN  
Digital input for connecting a game console,  
DVD player, video camera (etc.), that has an  
optical digital connection.  
CONTROL button (see p.74-78)  
Used together with the INPUT SELECTOR to  
select the function or use with the MASTER  
VOLUME to select the volume of the MULTI  
ROOM system.  
S VIDEO  
Video input for connecting a video camera  
(etc.), that has an S video out.  
ON/OFF button (see p.74-78)  
Use to switch Multi-room function on or off.  
RCA VIDEO / AUDIO (L/R)  
Video input for connecting a video camera, etc.  
That has standard RCA video/audio outputs.  
18 PHONES jack  
Connect headphones for private listening (no  
sound will be heard through the speakers).  
19 SP SYSTEM A/B button (see p.71)  
Use to select the speaker system. A is the  
primary setting. The button cycles through the  
speaker systems as follows: A]B]A&B]off.  
Different conditions apply when bi-amping the  
speakers. For this case refer to page 70.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Display  
All the display information is explained and/or referenced here.  
1
2
3
4
5
SIGNAL  
AUTO  
RF  
L
C
R
LS  
S
LFE  
RS  
DIGITAL  
OVER ATT  
DISC MTRX  
PRO LOGIC  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
TUNED STEREO MONO  
3
SP AB  
TAPE2  
Neo :6 MPEG  
2ch PLAYBACK  
EON  
RDS  
RF ATT  
8
7 6  
1 SIGNAL SELECT indicators  
5 Digital format indicators  
Light to indicate the input signal you selected.  
2 DIGITAL : Lights when a Dolby Digital signal is  
detected.  
ANALOG: Lights when analog signals are  
assigned.  
DIGITAL: Lights when digital audio signals are  
selected.  
2 RF: Lights when 2 RF signals are assigned.  
AUTO: Lights when the receiver is set to select  
the input signal automatically.  
DTS: Lights when a DTS signal is detected.  
MPEG: Lights when an MPEG signal is detected.  
THX: Lights when the HOME THX mode is  
selected.  
EX: Lights during Surround EX matrix processing.  
ES: Lights during DTS ES processing.  
DISC: Lights during DTS ES discrete processing  
MTRX: Lights during DTS ES matrix processing  
2 PRO LOGIC II: Lights during Dolby Pro Logic  
II processing.  
2 Program Format indicators  
For Dolby Digital or DTS sources : These  
indicators change according to which channels  
are active in the source. When all three LS (left  
surround), S (surround) and RS (right surround)  
light at the same time it means a source with a  
6.1 channel playback flag is being used.  
NEO:6: Lights during NEO:6 processing.  
2CH PLAYBACK Lights during two-channel  
playback.  
6 Speaker indicators  
Light to indicate the current speaker system, A  
and/or B.  
L Left front channel.  
C Center channel.  
R Right front channel.  
LS Left surround channel.  
S Surround channel (mono).  
RS Right surround channel.  
LFE Low Frequency Effects channel.  
7
TAPE 2 indicator  
Lights when the TAPE 2 monitor is on.  
8
TUNER indicators  
MONO: Lights when the tuner is set to receive  
FM broadcasts and when selected MPX mode.  
((( ))) Lights when LFE signal is input.  
3 Analog level indicators  
STEREO: Lights when a FM stereo broadcast is  
received in the auto stereo mode.  
OVER This lights if the signal is in danger of  
distorting for analog source signals. Press  
INPUT ATT on the front panel to lower the  
signal level.  
TUNED: Lights when a broadcast is received.  
ATT Lights when INPUT ATT is used to  
reduce the level of the analog source signal.  
4 Character display  
Shows current mode, status, etc.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
To ensure the best possible surround sound, complete the following setup operations. Some of these are the  
same (and take precedence over) the settings you made in the Quick Start Guide, so consider if the ones you  
made at that time were adequate. If you feel they were, move on to the next setting here. You only need to  
make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers, etc.). These setup operations use on-screen displays (OSDs) on your TV to display the settings and  
choices so be sure your TV and receiver are properly hooked up and that your TV is set to this receiver. You  
need to connect the remote control, with its built in mic, to the front panel of the receiver so that it can measure  
the sound and ensure the proper settings. For more information on the remote control hookup see page 13.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV, press  
SETUP  
the RECEIVER button on the remote  
control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
Make sure your TV is connected and set to the receiver.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
The menu possibilities appear on your TV.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
3 Use the 5∞ and buttons to select  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
SURROUND SETUP. Press ENTER.  
TUNER EDIT  
2
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
3~4  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
4 Follow the order below to set up your  
speakers for better sound. Use the 5∞  
and 2 3 buttons to navigate through  
the menus. When you have the setting  
you want in a particular menu, press  
ENTER.  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
System Setup  
3
[Auto Surround Setup]  
In each mode, the current settings are displayed. We  
suggest you adjust all these settings when you first hook  
up the receiver. That gets them out of the way and you  
won't need to return to this setting mode unless you  
change your home set up by adding new speakers (etc.).  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
[Exit]  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS (See p.36-37)  
Use to specify the type and number of speakers you  
connected.  
CHANNEL DELAY (See p.38)  
You must add distance settings to all your speakers for the  
most realistic surround sound. Adding a slight delay to  
some speakers enhances sound separation and is particu-  
larly important for achieving a surround sound effect. You  
need to figure out the distance from your listening position  
to your speakers to add the proper delay.  
CHANNEL LEVEL (See p.39-40)  
Use to balance the volumes of your different speakers.  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION (See p.41)  
This setting is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
The following steps show you how to select the correct setup for the type and number of speakers you  
connected. Most importantly, you need to decide how to route the sound for all the speakers you connected. To  
do this select the size of the front, center, surround and surround back speakers (if you hooked them up). It is  
important to make these settings as accurately as possible or, in some cases, you may not get the full  
soundtrack from a disc. The auto setup from the microphone in the remote control may not properly assess the  
size of your speakers if there is background noise, from an air conditioner or refrigerator, for example. If  
necessary try different possible settings manually.  
Use the information below to complete the steps that follow and set up the receiver to match the speakers you  
have hooked up. Make sure the microphone is hooked up to the front panel and in the appropriate position  
before starting. See page 13 for more information on setting up the microphone.  
FRONT (default setting is SMALL)  
Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the subwoofer. Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass  
frequencies effectively or if you did not connect a subwoofer. (If you select SMALL for the front speakers the  
subwoofer will automatically be switched YES. Also, the center and surround speakers cannot be set to  
LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer .)  
CENTER (default setting is SMALL)  
• Select LARGE if your speaker will reproduce bass frequencies effectively .  
• Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
• If you did not connect a center speaker, choose NO. In this case, the center channel is output from the  
front speakers.  
SURROUND (default setting is SMALL)  
• Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass frequencies effectively .  
• Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
• If you did not connect surround speakers choose NO. In this case, the sound of the surround channels is  
output from the front and center speakers.  
• Remember, If you select SMALL for the front speakers, the surround and surround back speakers can only  
be set to SMALL.  
SURROUND BACK (default setting is SMALL X2)  
• Select the number of surround back speakers you have. You can choose one speaker, two, or none.  
• If you select one, make sure that speaker if hooked up to the left surround back terminal.  
• Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass frequencies effectively .  
• Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
• If you did not connect surround back speakers choose NO.  
• If the front speakers or the surround speakers are set to SMALL, the surround back speakers will automati-  
cally be set to SMALL.  
• If you choose THX in step 2 then the surround back speakers can only be set to SMALL (X1 or )2, or NO.  
SUBWOOFER (default setting is YES)  
• Leave it selected if you connected a subwoofer.  
• If you selected SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be set to on (you won’ t be  
able to choose NO or PLUS).  
• If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO. In this case, the bass frequencies are output from the front  
or surround speakers.  
• Choose the PLUS setting if you want stronger reproduction of deep bass sounds.  
• If you select PLUS the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are all  
routed to the subwoofer.  
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
1 SPEAKER SYSTEMS should be  
selected. If it isn’t use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER button.  
The setup possibilities appear on your TV.  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~10  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
speaker system setting.  
1
Choose from :  
MANUAL FREE : Sets all the speakers  
MANUAL THX : Sets all the speakers to SMALL. The  
crossover frequency is fixed at 80kHz. You can only select  
the number of surround back speakers.  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Delay ]  
[ 3.Channel Level ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal ]  
[Return]  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
AUTO : All speakers are set automatically. (The remote  
control must be hooked up to the front panel in order to  
use this setting.)  
3.1. Speaker Systems  
2
[Manual Free]  
[Manual THX]  
(all small)  
[Auto]  
For MANUAL FREE, select it and press ENTER. Then go  
to step 3.  
[Return]  
For MANUAL THX, select it and press ENTER. Then go  
to step 3.  
For AUTO, select it and press ENTER. Be prepared for  
loud test tones and make sure the room is free of ambient  
noise (see memo page 15). When you see OK on the OSD  
the setup is finished. Go to step 9.  
2.1. Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
3,4  
5,6  
Speaker System Select  
[
Normal Surround  
Next)  
]
(
3 Use the 2 3 buttons to select either  
NORMAL SURROUND or FRONT BI-  
AMP (5.1).  
2.1. Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
NORMAL SURROUND: For normal home theater use  
FRONT BI-AMP (5.1): Settings for bi-amp (see p.70).  
Normal Surround  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[LARGE]  
[LARGE]  
[LARGE]  
4 Use the button to go to the next  
X
[LARGE 2]  
[
YES  
]
screen.  
(
NEXT)  
5 With the 5∞ buttons choose the set of  
2.1. Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
7
9
speakers that you want to set.  
Normal Surround  
If you selected MANUAL THX in step 2 set all speakers,  
except for surround back, to SMALL.  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[LARGE]  
[LARGE]  
[LARGE]  
X
[LARGE 2 ]  
[
YES  
]
6 Use the 2 3 buttons to choose the size  
and number for each set of speakers as  
well as LARGE, SMALL, YES, NO or  
PLUS.  
(
NEXT)  
3.1. Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
<
Front Bi-Amp (5.1)  
>
Crossover  
[
80Hz]  
Normal Surround  
(THX Speaker = 80Hz)  
Speaker B [ Bi-Amp  
7 Repeat steps 5 & 6 for all speakers  
channels.  
]
[Return]  
8
Use the button to go to the next screen.  
2.1. Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
10  
Normal Surround  
9 Use the 2 3 buttons to choose a  
Crossover Frequency of 50 Hz, 80 Hz,  
100 Hz, 150 Hz or 200 Hz.  
Crossover [ 80Hz ]  
Normal Surround  
(THX Speaker = 80Hz)  
Speaker B : Secound Zone  
[Return]  
Certain bass sounds will play back from the subwoofer if  
you selected it as YES (or PLUS), or from the front  
speakers if you selected them as LARGE.  
memo  
This setting decides where the cutoff will be between  
those bass sounds playing back from the speaker selected  
as above and the bass sounds for the entire soundtrack,  
which play back from all speakers used. If you selected  
MANUAL THX in step 2 the crossover frequency is fixed at  
80kHz and this screen does not appear.  
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass,  
it may seem logical to select LARGE for your  
front speakers and leave the subwoofer  
selected. This may not, however, yield the  
best bass results. Depending on the size and  
shape of your room you may actually  
experience a decrease in the amount of bass  
due to what is called "low frequency  
10 Use the 5∞ buttons to select RETURN  
and press ENTER.  
cancellations." If you have a subwoofer, listen  
to the bass response with the front speakers  
set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and  
let your ears judge which sounds best.  
If you have a subwoofer, the safest option is  
to route all the bass sounds to it by selecting  
SMALL for the front speakers.  
Next, proceed to CHANNEL DELA Y below.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
start over from step 1.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
CHANNEL DELAY  
Adding a slight delay to some speakers is necessary to achieve proper sound depth, separation as well as an  
effective surround sound effect. You need to figure out the distance from your listening position to your  
speakers to add the proper delay. The following steps show you how to set the delay time for each channel by  
specifying the distances from your listening position to each speaker. Once you specify the speaker distances  
(or it is done automatically through the AUTO selection, or in the Quick Start Guide), the receiver calculates the  
correct delay times automatically. If continuing from SPEAKER SYSTEMS go to step 1. If starting fresh,  
complete steps 1-3 in Setting Up for Surround Sound(p.35) first.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
1 The CHANNEL DELAY should be  
selected. If it isnt use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER button.  
The setup possibilities appear on your TV  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~4  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
2 There are two ways to set the  
CHANNEL DELAY, MANUAL and  
AUTO. Select the method youd like to  
use with the 5∞ buttons and press  
ENTER.  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
1
2
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Delay ]  
[ 3.Channel Level ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ]  
MANUAL : In this way of setting the distance you  
choose the speaker and adjust the distance yourself.  
AUTO : This way of setting the delay time is like that  
described in the Quick Start Guide (p.1315). The levels  
are set automatically by the receiver as it outputs the  
test tones. For this setup you must have the mic on the  
remote control connected (see page 13).  
[Return]  
3.2. Channel Delay  
[Manual]  
[Auto]  
[Return]  
WARNING : Be prepared! The test tones are output at  
a high volume level.  
MASTER VOLUME rotates to the reference position (0 dB)  
and the display on the receiver flashes TEST TONE. After a  
few seconds the test tone is output.  
Your Speaker Systems  
Normal Surround  
2.2. Channel Delay  
3
Manual  
3 For MANUAL, select each speaker with  
the 5∞ buttons. Use the 2 3 buttons  
to add or subtract the distance in feet  
that the speaker is from your normal  
listening position.  
L
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
10. 5ft  
9. 0ft  
10. 0ft  
8. 5ft  
7. 0ft  
6. 5ft  
8. 0ft  
11. 5ft  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
R
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Return]  
Adjust the speaker distance in half foot increments from  
0.5 to 45 feet (1 foot equals approximately 0.3 meters).  
The default setting is 10 ft.  
2.2. Channel Delay  
Manual  
[ 10. 0ft ]  
9. 0ft ]  
[ 10. 0ft ]  
L
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
R
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Return]  
[
[
[
[
8. 5ft ]  
7. 0ft ]  
6. 5ft ]  
8. 0ft ]  
4 When done select RETURN with the  
5∞ buttons and press ENTER.  
[ 11. 5ft ]  
Next, proceed to CHANNEL LEVEL below .  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Start over from step 1.  
2.2. Channel Delay  
4
Manual  
L
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
10. 0ft  
9. 0ft  
10. 0ft  
8. 5ft  
7. 0ft  
6. 5ft  
8. 0ft  
11. 5ft  
R
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Return]  
memo  
If you have two surround back speakers you can put them  
together, set them to the same distance and then use  
them get the benefit of ASA technology (see p.97, 101,  
103).  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
CHANNEL LEVEL (channel balance)  
The following steps show you how to balance the sound output level of your speakers. Proper speaker balance  
is essential for obtaining high quality surround sound. If continuing from CHANNEL DELAY go to step 1. If  
starting fresh, complete steps 1-3 in Setting Up for Surround Sound(p.35) first. If youre not sure of the best  
setting for your system, we recommend setting the CHANNEL LEVEL to AUTO.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
1 CHANNEL LEVEL should be selected. If  
it isnt use the 5∞ buttons to select  
and press ENTER.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~4  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select a channel  
level setting mode, then press ENTER.  
Test tones will be output.  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
There are three ways to set the CHANNEL LEVEL:  
MANUAL; SEMI AUTO; AUTO.  
MANUAL : For this setting method you move the test  
tone manually and adjust the channel level.  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
1
2
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Delay ]  
[ 3.Channel Level ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
SEMI AUTO : In this setting the test tone moves by  
itself and you set the levels.  
AUTO : This way of setting the levels is like that  
described in the Quick Start Guide (p.13). The levels are  
set automatically by the receiver as it outputs the test  
tones. For this setup you must have the mic on the  
remote control connected (see page 13).  
[Return]  
3.3. Channel Level  
[Manual]  
[Semi Auto]  
[Auto]  
Normal Surround  
[Return]  
WARNING : Be prepared! The test tones are output at  
a high volume level.  
MASTER VOLUME rotates to the reference position (0 dB)  
and the display on the receiver flashes TEST TONE. After a  
few seconds the test tone is output.  
Your Speaker Systems  
Normal Surround ”  
If your subwoofer has a volume control, set it to the  
middle position before doing these operations.  
memo  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
3 Adjust the level of each channel using  
the 2 3 buttons (except for the AUTO  
setting where the adjustment is done  
automatically).  
3.3. Channel Level  
3
Manual  
L
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+10. 0dB  
[
+10. 0dB  
R
[
+10. 0dB  
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Return]  
[
+10. 0dB  
[
[
- - -  
- - -  
dB  
dB  
[
[
+10. 0dB  
0. 0  
dB  
NOTE : The volume of the subwoofer test tone tends to  
sound lower than it actually is. You may need to adjust the  
level after testing with an actual soundtrack.  
3.3. Channel Level  
Semi Auto  
L
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+10. 0dB  
In MANUAL (manual test tone) mode  
This mode lets you switch the test tone between each  
speaker manually with the 5∞ buttons.  
[
+10. 0dB  
R
[
+10. 0dB  
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[
+10. 0dB  
[
[
- - -  
- - -  
dB  
dB  
[
[
+10. 0dB  
0. 0  
dB  
In SEMI AUTO (automatic test tone) mode  
Adjust the level of a speaker as its emitting the test tone.  
The tone will automatically switch between speakers after  
sounding for 2-3 seconds. The test tone is output in the  
following order:  
Return = Push Enter  
2.3. Channel Level  
4
Manual  
L
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
+1. 5dB  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-3. 5dB  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
FL  
CT  
SL  
FR  
SR  
R
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
[Return]  
SW  
SBL  
SBR  
-1. 5dB  
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
+10. 0dB  
If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter  
Take the readings from your main listening position and  
adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting  
/slow reading).  
4 In MANUAL mode: When done select  
RETURN with the 5∞ buttons and  
press ENTER.  
In SEMI AUTO mode: Press ENTER to  
exit the process  
The display on the receiver will say RESUME and the  
MASTER VOLUME will return to its original position.  
Next, proceed to Acoustic Calibration.  
memo  
You can change the channel level of each speaker at any time by using the EFFECT CH/SEL. and +/-  
buttons on the remote control. You can set the levels for each three groups of the listening modes  
(STANDARD/HOME THX, ADVANCED CINEMA/ADVANCED CONCERT, STEREO) and MULTI CH IN  
mode but keep in mind that all your settings will be cleared if you use the Surround Setup or Auto  
Surround Sound Setup to set the channel levels at a later date.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
Acoustic Calibration EQ  
This setting is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers. You can select a frequency balance between your  
speakers that suits your personal tastes. This feature also allows you to increase the amount of a certain  
frequency in the soundtrack, which will have the effect of hearing more (or less) bass, mid-range or treble.  
When you use Acoustic Calibration EQ (see p.50) you can toggle between two variations (ALL CH ADJ and  
FRONT ALIGN) of this setting. Both are set here. If continuing from CHANNEL LEVEL go to step 1. If starting  
fresh, complete steps 1-3 in Setting Up for Surround Sound(p.35) first.  
1 ACOUSTIC CAL EQ should be selected.  
SETUP  
If it isnt use the 5∞ buttons to select  
and press ENTER.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 AUTO will appear on the OSD. Press  
ENTER.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
There are two types of curve modes that will be set.  
These are ALL CH ADJ mode and FRONT ALIGN mode.  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
ALL CH ADJ mode (flat curve): All the speakers are  
set individually (except for the subwoofer). No  
special weighting is given to any channel over any  
other channel so this setting is the most direct  
representation of the source being played.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~4  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
FRONT ALIGN mode (front speaker curve): All  
speakers (except for the subwoofer) are set in  
accordance with the settings of the FRONT speak-  
ers. This setting allows the listener to enjoy a sound  
balance defined by the front speakers (the main  
speakers for home theater).  
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
3.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
1
The frequency balance is set automatically by the  
receiver (see page 15) and both types curves are  
adjusted this way.  
[ 1.Speaker Systems]  
[ 2.Channel Delay ]  
[ 3.Channel Level ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
WARNING: the test tones are very loud!! Make sure  
there are no infants or small children in the room and  
that no one who will be scared, upset or damaged by  
loud noise is present. You yourself may want to wear  
earplugs.  
[Return]  
3 After it has finished, you see the  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ CHECK screen. If  
you want to view the settings select  
NEXT and press ENTER. If not, simply  
go to the next step.  
4 Select RETURN with the 5∞ buttons  
and press ENTER.  
You will return to the SURROUND SETUP menu.  
Next, if you want, proceed to Check the Auto Settings .  
memo  
See page 50 to use the ACOUSTIC CAL  
feature.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
Check the Auto Settings  
If you want to check what settings have been input for your surround sound parameters you can do it following  
the steps below.  
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select CHECK  
SETUP  
and press ENTER.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 The first menu in which you can check  
your settings will appear. This is the  
speaker settings.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
You can navigate this menu with the 2 3 buttons but  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
we recommend you follow the steps below.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
The order of the settings menus is: Speakers; Channel  
Delay; Channel Level; Acoustic Calibration.  
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~6  
RETURN  
3 To check the next settings select NEXT  
with the 5∞ buttons and press ENTER.  
If you want to leave the settings check select RETURN  
with the 5∞ buttons and press ENTER and go to step 6.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
4 Continue to move through the menus  
using the 5∞ buttons to select NEXT  
and pressing ENTER until you are done  
checking the settings.  
3.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
1
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Delay ]  
[ 3.Channel Level ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal ]  
5 To exit the check select RETURN with  
the 5∞ buttons and press ENTER .  
You will return to the SURROUND SETUP menu.  
[Return]  
6 To exit the SURROUND SETUP menu  
select RETURN with the 5∞ buttons  
and press ENTER. Then select EXIT  
with the 5∞ buttons and press ENTER.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback  
The following instructions show you how to play Dolby Digital or DTS sound sources with the VSX-47TX.  
Before doing so be sure to complete the setup procedures described in the Quick Start Guide (starting on page  
13) or Setting Up for Surround Sound (starting on page 35). This is particularly important to achieve a surround  
sound effect with Dolby Digital or DTS sources.  
Listening modes available to you are contingent on what kind of source you are using and what LISTENING CH  
SELECT (5.1, 7.1, AUTO) option you choose. For background information on these ideas see page 9 (Home  
Theater: The Basics) and for more information of the listening modes and their uses see pages 46-49. Be sure to  
select Speaker system A (see p.71) or A&B if you are bi-amping the front speakers (see p.70).  
1 Turn on the power of the playback  
SETUP  
component.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press the STANDBY/ON  
button to turn on the  
receiver.  
2
STANDBY  
indicator  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
3
5
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
Be sure that the standby indicator turns  
off on the front panel.  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
STANDBY/ON  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
STANDBY  
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
OFF  
ON  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL (or  
INPUT) on the remote control to  
select the source you want to  
playback.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
3
7
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
On the front panel, use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to  
select the source.  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
The default setting for the input signal is AUTO, if you  
need to select ANALOG, DIGITAL or 2 RF see p.45.  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
4
Î
4 Press the LISTENING CH SEL. button  
on the remote control.  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
Each press switches LISTENING CH SELECT between  
5,1, 7.1 and AUTO (see page 44 for more on this). On  
the front panel, use the LISTENING CH SELECT button  
to select the channel.  
2
5
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER VSX-47TX  
LISTENING MODE SELECTOR  
STANDBY/ON  
5 Choose a listening mode by pressing  
STEREO/DIRECT, THX, ADVANCED  
CINEMA, ADVANCED CONCERT, or  
STANDARD.  
MAC3  
STANDBY  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
TAPE1/MD  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
OFF  
ON  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
VCR  
VCR2  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MASTER VOLUME  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
On the front panel, use the LISTENING MODE  
SELECTOR dial. Depending on whether your source is  
2 channel, 5.1 channel or 7.1 channel and your speaker  
configuration you will get different options for each of  
these modes. Press the button (or dial) repeatedly to  
cycle through these options.  
3 4  
7
See “Listening Modes,” on p.46-49 for details on  
which modes are available and in which situations they  
are designed to be used.  
6 Start playback of the component  
you selected in step 3.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
7 Adjust the volume by using the  
VOLUME buttons on the remote  
control. On the front panel use the  
MASTER VOLUME dial.  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
7
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
If the TAPE 2 indicator is visible in the  
display, it means the TAPE 2 MONITOR  
is on. Press TAPE 2 MONITOR (front  
panel) or TAPE 2 (remote) to turn it off  
unless you want to listen to the  
component hooked up to TAPE 2.  
memo  
Switching the channels used for playback (LISTENING CH SELECT)  
This button selects the number of channels used for playback, either 5.1 or 7.1 (includes 6.1). The default setting  
is AUTO, which will choose the appropriate playback channels for the source, speaker configuration and  
listening mode you are using. For more details see pages 46-49.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
1 Press the LISTENING CH SEL. button  
on the remote control.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
Each press switches LISTENING CH SELECT between  
5.1, 7.1 and AUTO.  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
1
Î
If you haven't set your system up with surround  
back speakers you won't be able to choose 7.1  
channel or AUTO with this button.  
LISTENING CH SELECT options may change if  
the SPEAKER SYSTEM settings are changed.  
(p.36-37).  
memo  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
LISTENING CH SELECT affects which listening  
modes will be available.  
You can't select LISTENING CH SELECT in  
STEREO mode.  
1
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Switching ANALOG/DIGITAL Signal Input  
This button selects the type of input signal, ANALOG, DIGITAL or 2RF, sent to the receiver. You need to take  
special care to switch to the appropriate input when necessary. For example, the switch would have to be on  
DIGITAL to hear DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS surround sound material but it would have to be on analog to record  
from the ANALOG out jacks on the receiver. The default setting is AUTO which chooses digital over analog  
when both are available but goes with whatever is available if it is the only choice.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the SIGNAL SELECT button to  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
select the input signal corresponding  
to the format of the source  
component.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
Each press switches the signal in the order below:  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
AUTO  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
2RF  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
2
ENTER  
9
0
D
RECT ACCESS  
D SP MODE  
1
memo  
In the AUTO setting, receiver chooses the signal, based on availability, in the following order of priority:  
2RF, DIGITAL, ANALOG.  
When DIGITAL signal is selected, 2 DIGITAL lights when a Dolby Digital signal is input; DTS lights when a  
DTS signal is input.  
If no digital inputs are assigned (see p.12), the SIGNAL SELECT will default to ANALOG.  
Because the audio signal from a karaoke microphone and LDs are recorded with analog audio only, they are  
not output from the digital outputs. Set SIGNAL SELECT to ANALOG to listen to these formats.  
When an LD with DTS is played back with the SIGNAL SELECT set in ANALOG, digital noise caused by  
playing back the DTS signal directly (with no decoding) is output. To prevent noise, you need to make digital  
connections (See p.22 & 23) and set SIGNAL SELECT to AUTO or DIGITAL.  
Some DVD players dont output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with  
your DVD player.  
This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32kHz, 44kHz, 48kHz, 88kHz and 96kHz sampling  
frequency), and DTS digital signal formats. If your source is not one of these select ANALOG for playback.  
Make sure you connect your DVD/LD or LD players using the 2 RF jack. If your player has a 2RF output  
this will ensure you can use all LDs. Refer to p.17.  
Playback of 96kHz 24 bit sound formats  
This receiver is capable of playing back 96kHz/24bit sound formats (such as DTS 96/24 and PCM 96kHz (up to  
24bit).  
To Playback with the Best Sound Quality (all processing is done at 96 kHz).  
For DTS 96/24 5.1 format, connect both center and surround left/right speakers, set LISTENING CH SELECT to  
AUTO or 5.1, choose STANDARD mode and turn off all sound functions. For 96kHz 2ch format (either DTS or  
PCM) choose STEREO mode and turn off sound functions. For both these playbacks, "96kHz" will appear in the  
receiver's display. If it doesn't the processing is being done at 48kHz.  
You can listen to DTS 96/24 soundtracks through this receiver if your DVD player has a DTS output feature, even  
if it can't output 96kHz digital signals. For PCM 96kHz soundtracks, however, you won't be able to listen to  
them with digital connections if your DVD player can't output 96kHz digital signals.  
Check the manual that came with your DVD player to confirm what it can output and for more information on  
these formats. Also, if you set the Re-Equalization function (p.98) you can use 96kHz processing.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening Modes  
The five listening mode types on the receiver are explained here. To select listening modes see pages 43-44.  
The kind of playback you can get in the three modes, STANDARD, HOME THX, and ADVANCED CINEMA,  
depends on what kind of a source (DVD, etc.) you are using. The basic distinction is between 2 channel sources  
and multichannel sources. The modes that are available to you with these ADVANCED CINEMA modes will  
differ depending on the source. Also, different modes are used for different speaker configurations. This is  
explained below as well.  
For home theater STANDARD, HOME THX, and ADVANCED CINEMA listening modes are designed to deliver  
realistic and powerful multichannel surround sound that recreates the movie theater experience. You may need  
to experiment with them to see which settings suit your home system and personal tastes.  
The ADVANCED CONCERT and STEREO modes are designed to be used with music sources but some  
ADVANCED CONCERT modes are also suited for film soundtracks. Again, try different settings with various  
soundtracks to see which you like.  
You must choose one of the three cinema modes or the ADVANCED CONCERT mode in order to get surround  
sound. Depending on your setup, in STEREO mode only the front two speakers, and sometimes the subwoofer  
(if you have one), are used.  
STEREO modes  
When a source is played in this mode, it plays through just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your  
subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel sources are downmixed  
to stereo.  
STEREO  
In STEREO mode the audio plays according to the surround setup settings and you can still use Acoustic  
Calibration EQ, Digital NR, Midnight mode, Loudness mode and Tone Control functions.  
DIRECT  
In DIRECT mode, the audio bypasses all types of signal processing to remain as close to the source audio  
quality as possible.  
Note: If you switch on Acoustic Calibration EQ, Digital NR, Midnight mode, Loudness mode or Tone Control  
when DIRECT is selected, the receiver automatically switches to STEREO.  
STANDARD modes  
This mode is for pure decoding of Dolby Digital, Dolby Surround and DTS sources as well as surround matrix  
decoding of 2 channel sources. It is good for enjoying regular movies/videos that have been recorded in Dolby  
Digital, Dolby Surround, DTS, STANDARD TX/SX is also the basic mode for enjoying sources with surround and  
surround back channels. For more detailed information see p.99-101. You will only be able to access the second  
two modes if you have hooked up surround back speaker(s). For more detailed information see p.11, 25, 36-37.  
The display will show you what kind of decoding (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is being used.  
For 2 Channel Sources:  
2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE  
This mode gives 5.1 channel surround sound. It is suitable for movies, especially those recorded in Dolby  
Surround. The channel separation and movement of surround effects is comparable to Dolby Digital 5.1.  
2PRO LOGIC II MUSIC  
This mode gives 5.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for music. Compared to the Movie Mode, the  
surround effect is more enveloping.  
2PRO LOGIC  
This mode gives 4.1 channel surround sound. It is less sensitive to the quality of the source material, so  
may be useful when 2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE/ MUSIC modes do not give good results.  
NEO:6 CINEMA  
This mode gives 6.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for movies. The NEO:6 Cinema mode delivers  
good channel separation for movie soundtracks.  
NEO:6 MUSIC  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
This mode gives 6.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for music. The NEO:6 Music mode plays the  
stereo source as is through the front left/right speakers, and generates a natural, ambient surround and  
center sound.  
For 6.1 or 7.1 channel playback of 5.1 Channel Sources:  
SX (Studio extension)  
You can only use this mode if you have setup this receiver for use with surround back speaker(s) (see  
pages 11, 25, 36-37) and select 7.1 in LISTENING CH SELECT (see p.44).  
This mode adds surround back channel(s) to 5.1 channel sources to give 7.1 channel surround sound. The  
sound you hear from the surround back speaker(s) is the same as the surround speakers. This recreates a  
5.1 channel surround sound mixing studio or theater, which would usually have more than 6 speakers. The  
display shows the format of the source played.  
TX (Technical extension)  
You can only use this mode if you have setup this receiver for use with surround back speaker(s) (see  
pages 11, 25, 36-37) and select 7.1 in LISTENING CH SELECT (see p.44).  
This mode generates surround back channel(s) for conventional 5.1 channel sources to give 7.1 channel  
surround sound. Any 5.1 channel source can be used, but some movies have soundtracks that sound  
especially good with TX mode on.  
With 6.1 channel playback compatible sources, the TX mode is automatically selected when the  
LISTENING CH SELECT is set to AUTO (default).  
HOME THX modes  
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by Lucasfilm, Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. The  
aim of Home THX is to improve the sound of straight decoding to make home theater audio more like the sound  
you hear in a cinema. See pages 100-101 for more information.  
For all speaker playback of any source:  
THX CINEMA  
This mode will play any source through all the speakers in your system.  
For 2 channel sources only:  
After selecting one of the following modes the display shows the mode you selected, then, after a few  
seconds, shows THX CINEMA.  
2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE  
See page 46 for more on this mode.  
2PRO LOGIC  
See page 46 for more on this mode.  
NEO:6 CINEMA  
See page 46 for more on this mode.  
For 6.1 or 7.1 channel playback of 5.1 channel sources:  
THX SURROUND EX  
You can only choose this mode if you have set up this receiver for use with surround back speaker(s) (see  
pages 11, 25, 36-37) and select 7.1 in LISTENING CH SELECT (see p.44).  
For true 6.1 channel cinema sound, Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded discs should be played with THX  
Surround EX processing. However, it will also generate surround back channel(s) from any Dolby Digital 5.1  
or DTS 5.1 channel disc. (when playing a DTS disc, the display shows DTS-ES +THX.  
With 6.1 channel playback compatible sources, the THX SURROUND EX mode is automatically selected  
when the LISTENING CH SELECT is set to AUTO (default).  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
For 7.1 channel playback of 5.1 channel sources:  
THX ULTRA2 CINEMA  
You can only choose this mode if you have set up this receiver for use with two surround back speakers  
(see pages 11, 25, 36-37 and select 7.1 in LISTENING CH SELECT (see p.44).  
When played using THX SURROUND EX, the surround sound field may actually sound narrower on some  
earlier Dolby Digital 5.1 and DTS 5.1 channel sources than with THX CINEMA processing. THX ULTRA2  
CINEMA creates two extra channels from these sources and plays them through the surround back  
speakers.  
With 5.1 channel sources, the THX ULTRA2 CINEMA mode is automatically selected when the LISTENING  
CH SELECT is set to AUTO (default).  
THX MUSICMODE  
You can only choose this mode if you have set up this receiver for use with two surround back speakers  
(see pages 11, 25, 36-37) and select 7.1 in LISTENING CH SELECT (see p.44).  
THX MUSICMODE is for Dolby Digital 5.1 and DTS 5.1 channel sources that were not produced for a  
theatrical releasetypically music. This mode creates two extra channels of natural, ambient sound and  
plays them through the surround back speakers.  
ADVANCED CINEMA modes  
The ADVANCED CINEMA mode is a newly designed system for enhancing movie soundtracks and other audio-  
visual sources that optimizes its effects in accordance with your source, LISTENING CH SELECT and speaker  
configuration. There are six ADVANCED CINEMA settings that use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to create  
different types of sound environments.  
ACTION  
This mode is designed for action movies, which generally use lots of sound effects. The mode enriches the  
sound to make it more realistic and extends the parameters to pick up high and low sound effects.  
SCI-FI  
This mode is designed for science fiction movies. It creates a broad sound space, separating dialog from  
sound effects to heighten the overall impact of the soundtrack.  
DRAMA  
This mode is designed for movies with a lot of dialog. The elements of dialog are enhanced, making the  
characters seem more real. The mode also compresses the dynamic range somewhat so loud sounds do  
not overpower softer ones (compare this with the MIDNIGHT listening mode explained on p.51).  
MUSICAL  
This mode is primarily for music and adds a spacious feeling to the sound. A long delay time of reflected  
sounds provides resonant tones which emulate a concert hall.  
MONOFILM  
This mode is designed for older movies which are recorded with mono soundtracks. The special sound  
processing of this mode will allow you to experience these movies in surround sound even though they  
were not recorded that way originally.  
X-D THEATER  
This mode is especially designed to give sound depth to stereo sources. The overall effect builds a  
dynamic and broad sound space, allowing two-channel (stereo) signals to faithfully imitate a five speaker  
sound. The mode should be used in conjunction with Dolby Pro Logic for sources bearing the  
DOLBY SURROUND  
mark.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
ADVANCED CONCERT modes  
The ADVANCED CONCERT (Digital Signal Processing) modes allow you to transform your living room into a  
variety of different sonic environments when playing either two-channel or multichannel sources. It optimizes its  
effects in accordance with your source, LISTENING CH SELECT and speaker configuration.  
CLASSICAL  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a large concert hall. Suitable for classical music. A long delay time of  
reflected sounds, coupled with reverb effects, let the listener experience the dynamic and rich sounds  
characteristic of concert halls and powerful orchestral performances.  
CHAMBER  
Simulates the acoustic environment of a very resonant concert hall. Rich reverberation and a full sound  
create the impression of a lively performance space.  
JAZZ  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a jazz club. Reflected sound is virtually below 100 msec so that the  
listener can experience a live band effect.  
ROCK  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a mid-sized concert hall. The listener can experience a live band effect  
with good separation of the instruments, a strong bass and the vivid feeling of a live performance.  
DANCE  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a dance club. Features a strong bass sound.  
Reflected sound delay time is virtually below 50 msec, for the listener to experience the visceral power of  
dance music.  
X-CH STEREO  
Simulates the acoustic environment of a regular stereo while using all the speakers in the system to induce  
a rich, all-around sound. The display will change to 5CH STEREO or 7CH STEREO according to the sources,  
LISTENING CH SELECT and speaker configuration.  
Adjusting the Effect of ADVANCED Listening Modes  
The ADVANCED listening modes have sound processing added to accentuate a certain kind of atmosphere or  
effect (see the preceding pages for explanation). You can choose if you want to strengthen or weaken this  
effect in the given mode.  
The following instructions show you how to adjust the amount of effect.  
VCR1/  
DVR  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
TUNER  
OPERATION  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
RECEIVER  
1
2
3
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
2 Press the EFFECT/CH SEL. button  
repeatedly until you see “EFFECT” in  
the receiver’s display.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
3 Use the +/– buttons to add or  
subtract the amount of effect.  
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
The amount of effect can be adjusted ranging  
from 10 to 90 (the default setting value is 70) by  
pressing +/.  
memo  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
5/7CH STEREO modes cannot be adjusted.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ  
You can listen to the soundtrack with the Acoustic Calibration EQ you set on page 41. To do so follow the  
instructions below. For information about each Acoustic Calibration EQ mode, see page 41.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
1 Press the ACOUSTIC CAL. button on  
the remote control or on the front  
panel.  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
Each press switches acoustic calibration EQ between  
ALL CH ADJ, FCH ALIGN and OFF.  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
1
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
• After completing the AUTO SURROUND SETUP  
memo  
(p.13) or setup using AUTO (p.41), ACOUSTIC  
CAL ON (ALL CH ADJ) is set automatically.  
You can’t turn on ACOUSTIC CAL. on in MULTI  
CH IN mode.  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
• If you turn ACOUSTIC CAL. on in DIRECT mode,  
the receiver automatically switches to STEREO  
mode.  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
1
Reducing Noise During Playback (DIGITAL NR Function)  
To reduce extraneous noise switch on DIGITAL NR. This feature is effective with sources containing a lot of  
background noise like cassette and video tape  
1 Press the DIGITAL NR button on the  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
remote control or on the front panel.  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
Each press switches DIGITAL NR on or off.  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
1
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
memo  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
• In cases described below, noise may not be reduced even  
if DIGITAL NR is on.  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
· Sudden noise  
AXD7290  
· Extremely loud noise  
· Signals that contain too many high frequencies  
Signals which are very cleanly to begin with.  
• DIGITAL NR is effective at levels shown below for each  
source.  
STEREO (excluding 96 kHz)  
· Analog input ..................................................... 10-18 dB  
· Digital input ...................................................... 10-15 dB  
· AM/FM tuner ................................................... 10-15 dB  
ADVANCED/STANDARD/96 kHz stereo ................ 6-10 dB  
• Depending on the condition of the source, there may not  
be a noticeable improvement in the quality of the sound.  
You can’t use the DIGITAL NR mode with the HOME THX  
or MULTI CH IN mode.  
• If you set the DIGITAL NR on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
1
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode  
This useful feature makes it possible to get excellent surround sound effects even when listening at low  
volumes. It can be used with any surround sound source and play soundtracks so that the quieter sounds are  
audible even while playing a soundtrack at low volumes. This feature is applicable only when the master volume  
is under 20 dB.  
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
1 Press the MIDNIGHT button on the  
remote control or on the front panel.  
Each press switches MIDNIGHT mode on or off.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
1
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
The surround effect adjusts itself automatically  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
in accordance with the volume level.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
memo  
You cant use the MIDNIGHT mode with the  
HOME THX, MULTI CH IN, LOUDNESS or TONE  
CONTROL modes.  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
If you set MIDNIGHT on when in DIRECT mode  
the receiver switches to STEREO mode.  
1
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode  
The LOUDNESS mode boosts the bass and treble in a signal. It is useful for listening to music at low volumes.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
2 Press the LOUDNESS button on the  
SETUP  
remote control.  
Each press switches LOUDNESS mode on or off.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
memo  
You cant use the LOUDNESS mode with the  
HOME THX, MULTI CH IN, MIDNIGHT, or TONE  
CONTROL modes.  
If you set LOUDNESS on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
2
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (TONE CONTROL)  
You can adjust the low (bass) and high (treble) frequencies. The TONE button can also be used to bypass the  
tone circuitry.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the TONE button on the  
remote control or the front panel to  
put the receiver in tone adjust mode.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
There are two tone modes TONE: ON and TONE:  
BYPASS. The first means the tone functions are active  
and also lets you adjust these functions. The second  
means the tone controls are being bypassed, and thus  
have no effect on the sound.  
If TONE: BYPASS appears, press the button again to  
get TONE: ON, which is the tone adjust mode.  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
4
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
2
3
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
3 Press the BASS/TREBLE button  
repeatedly to select BASS or  
TREBLE.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL+  
CHANNEL–  
4 Use the +/– buttons to adjust the low  
or high frequency levels.  
A few seconds after you finish adjusting the tone the  
receiver will revert to the sound mode it was in at the  
beginning of the process.  
3
2 4  
The tone control can be adjusted in a range of 6 dB.  
The tone control cannot be set on in HOME THX, MULTI CH IN, MIDNIGHT or LOUDNESS  
modes.  
If the receiver is in DIRECT mode and you press the TONE button, TONE: BYPASS appears in  
the display. You will need to press TONE once more to switch the tone control on, canceling the  
STEREO DIRECT mode.  
memo  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
DVD Audio/MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback  
MULTI CH IN allows you to connect a DVD audio player or an external decoder to enjoy certain types of  
specialized discs. To use MULTI CH playback follow the instructions below.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
1 Press the MULTI CH IN button on the  
remote controls Receiver MAIN  
screen or the MULTI CH INPUT  
button on the front panel.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Each press switches the input between the previous  
mode and MULTI CH IN.  
1
Î
ON: This is a true playback of the signal from the  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
MULTI CH INPUT terminals, output without digital  
processing. You can only control each channel level.  
OFF: Cancels the MULTI CH IN modes.  
2 Use the LISTENING CH SEL button to  
select the number of input channels.  
You can select 2 or 8 channels. For best sound quality  
use 2 channels when you listen to stereo sources.  
1 2  
You cant use any kind of sound processing together with MULTI CH IN. Selecting a listening mode,  
or switching these modes, cancels the MULTI CH IN.  
memo  
If the center speaker is set to NOthe signal for that channel is divided between the front speak-  
ers. If any other speakers are set to NOthe signal for that (those) channel(s) wont get output at  
all.  
You cannot set sound features (p.50-52) on, in MULTI CH IN mode.  
See MULTI CH IN SELECT (p.94) for more on MULTI CH IN  
playback.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
DUAL MONO setting and playback  
The dual mono setting can only be used when listening to Dolby Digital or homemade discs that have dual mono  
software encoded in them. Dual mono software usually is used to put two different mono recordings with one  
soundtrack on one DVD. With this setting you can choose which channel in the dual mono setting you want to  
listen to. Remember this setting is only applicable if you are using Dolby Digital software with dual mono and  
want to isolate one of the channels therein.  
1 Press the LISTENING CH SELECT  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
button for more than five seconds to  
put the receiver in DUAL MONO  
mode.  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
Hold down the LISTENING CH SELECT button to cycle  
through the different DUAL MONO settings. When you  
find the one you want release the button. The L (ch1)  
and R (ch2) indicators in the display light to indicate the  
playback channel.  
1
DUAL : ch1  
DUAL : ch2  
The default setting is DUAL ch1.  
You can only use this function with  
Dolby Digital sources that have this  
function  
DUAL: ch1/ch2  
memo  
The different settings are: DUAL ch1, where you only  
hear channel 1; DUAL ch2, where you only hear channel  
2; and DUAL ch1/ch2, where you hear both channels,  
but independently from different speakers.  
Input Attenuator  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it is too strong, causing distortion in the  
sound.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Use the INPUT ATT button on the  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
remote control.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
2
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
Tape 2 Monitor  
If you connect a cassette deck with a record monitor function (a three-head tape deck) to the TAPE 2  
MONITOR jacks, you can listen to the sound of an analog recording as its being recorded.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Use the TAPE 2 MONITOR button on  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
the remote control to listen to the  
component hooked up to the TAPE 2  
MONITOR jacks.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
2
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
54  
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Using Headphones  
1 Plug headphones into the headphone  
jack on the front of the receiver.  
No sound will be audible from the speakers when  
headphones are plugged in.  
All listening modes will be downmixed to 2 chan-  
1 headphone jack  
memo  
nels.  
If youre listening to a 2 channel source there will  
be no matrix decoding (i.e. you will not be able to  
get surround sound decoding).  
If your U-shaped connectors (see p.30) arent in  
place you wont be able to use headphones.  
Video Select  
This function allows you to listen to one sound source while you watch a different video source on your TV. The  
sound source is set in the normal fashion as explained on p.43 & 44 You then change the video input with the  
VIDEO SEL button.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the VIDEO SEL button on the  
remote control to cycle through the  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
different possible video inputs.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
The first press shows the video input you are currently  
using. After that pressing VIDEO SELECT cycles though  
the possibilities in the following order:  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
VIDEO  
DVD/LD  
OFF  
TV  
SAT  
VCR 2  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
2
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
D
RECT ACCESS  
D SP MODE  
VCR 1/DVR  
The OFF setting means you are listening without a  
video signal. (Also, when you select CD-R/TAPE1/MD,  
CD, TUNER, or PHONO functions the VIDEO SELECT  
will be set to off.)  
After choosing a video input the display on the receiver  
will show that input for about 5 seconds and then  
revert to showing the listening mode the receiver is in.  
2
The VIDEO SELECT remains set to the input you  
memo  
chose until you change the audio input.  
If you change audio functions the receiver will  
reset itself to make the video and audio inputs  
correspond.  
Also, if you switch the power of the receiver off  
when you turn it back on the video and audio in-  
puts will reset so that they correspond.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display  
Use the display DIMMER button to adjust the brightness of the fluorescent display.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Use the display DIMMER button on  
the remote control to alternate  
between the different levels of  
brightness for the display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
Four levels of brightness ranging from very dim to very  
bright can be selected. Each press changes the  
brightness of the display. When cycling through the  
options, the default brightness can also be selected.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
2
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
Please note: It is a feature of this unit that the  
ENTER  
memo  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
fluorescent display will be brighter for a few sec-  
onds after you choose a function (like DVD/LD,  
CD, etc.) and then get softer. This will still hap-  
pen when you adjust the brightness but the new  
setting will be the one the display softens to.  
Status Display  
The Status display lets you see what the status is for most of the settings in this section.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
SETUP  
2 Press the STATUS button.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
The status of the settings will appear on both the OSD  
and the display on the receiver. For the latter the  
settings will appear in the following order for two  
seconds each.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
Listening Channel Select  
LISTEN'CH:7.1  
Acoustic Calibration  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
A-EQ:ALL CH ADJ  
Digital Noise Reduction  
DIGITAL NR:OFF  
Midnight Mode/ Loudness/ Tone Control  
MID LOUD TN:OFF  
Input Attenuator  
RETURN  
2
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUN NG  
8
BAND  
TUN NG  
+
LISTEN'CH SEL : 7.1ch  
ACOUS. CAL EQ : ALL ADJ  
DIGITAL NR :  
MIDNIGHT :  
LOUDNESS :  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
TONE CONTROL :  
INPUT ATT :  
TAPE2 MONITOR :  
VIDEO SELECT :  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
INPUT ATT:OFF  
DVD/LD  
Tape 2 Monitor  
TAPE2:OFF  
Video Select  
VSEL: DVD/LD  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Automatic and Manual Tuning  
The following steps show you how to tune in FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the exact frequency of the station you want, see “Direct  
Access Tuning“ on the following page.  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
SETUP  
On the remote, this selects the tuner function on the  
receiver and sets the remote to the tuner operation  
mode.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
2 Press the BAND button to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
Each press switches the band: FM j AM  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
3
2
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
3 Tune in the station.  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
For Automatic Tuning  
Press and hold TUNING –/+ for about one second, then  
release.  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
The tuner starts searching the selected band and stop  
automatically at the first station it locates. Repeat to  
locate other stations.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
For Manual Tuning  
AXD7290  
• To change frequencies one step at a time, press  
TUNING –/+ repeatedly.  
• To change frequencies quickly, hold down TUNING  
–/+ and release when you reach the frequency you  
desire.  
MPX Mode  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators do not light when  
tuning an FM station, because the station is too far away or  
the broadcast signal is weak, press MPX on the remote  
control to switch to MONO reception. This should improve  
reception enough for you to enjoy the broadcast.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Direct Access Tuning  
The following steps show you how to tune directly to a specific frequency using the remote control.  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
SETUP  
This selects the tuner function on the receiver and sets  
the remote to the tuner operation mode.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press the BAND button to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
Each press switches the band : FM j AM  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
3
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
3 Press the DIRECT ACCESS button to  
activate the direct access tuning  
mode.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
4
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
The cursor blinks in the display on the front panel.  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
2
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
4 Use the number buttons to enter the  
frequency of the station you want.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
Example:  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
To tune station 106.00 (FM), press: 1 = ` = 6 =  
` = `  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
To cancel before inputting the frequency  
Press DIRECT ACCESS, and enter the frequency again.  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Memorizing Frequently Used Stations  
The following steps show you how to memorize up to 30 radio stations in 3 classes (each holding 10 stations).  
When memorizing FM frequencies, the receiver also memorizes the MPX mode (STEREO or MONO).  
1 Tune in the station you want.  
SETUP  
See "Automatic and Manual Tuning" or "Direct Access  
Tuning" on page 57 and 58.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press the TUNER EDIT button to  
activate the memory function.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
3 Press the DTV MENU CLASS button  
repeatedly to select a class number.  
Each press switches the display:  
2
3
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
5
4
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
CLASS A  
CLASS B  
CLASS C  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
4 Press the STATION –/+ buttons (or  
the number buttons) repeatedly to  
select a channel (0~9) within the  
respective class.  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
The station is memorized automatically after 5 sec-  
onds.  
5 Press the ENTER button to input  
your choice.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Naming Memorized Stations  
You can input a name of up to eight characters for each preset station in the receivers memory (see the  
previous page). This name can be anything you choose. For example, you could input "CLASSICS" for that station  
and when you listen to it the name, rather than the frequency number, will appear on your display.  
1 Press the TUNER button on the  
SETUP  
remote control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press DTV MENU CLASS repeatedly  
to select the class.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
Repeatedly pressing this button cycles through the  
three available classes, A, B and C.  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
6
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
3 Press STATION + or STATION to  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
select the preset channel.  
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
4
5
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
4 Press TUNER EDIT to select the  
station name mode.  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
2
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
3
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
5 Enter the station name you want.  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
Use 5 (TUNE +) or (TUNE ) to cycle through the  
available characters. Press 3 (ST +) to move to the  
next character position once you reach the character  
you want. Press 2 to move back a character position.  
Any time you want to exit the process you can press  
the TUNER EDIT button.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
6 Press ENTER when you have got the  
characters you want to enter.  
Repeat steps 2 to 6 to memorize up to 30 preset  
broadcast station names.  
memo  
To erase a station name, enter eight spaces  
for the station name.  
To change a station name, enter a new name  
over the top of the existing one.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Recalling Memorized Stations  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
SETUP  
This selects the TUNER function on the receiver and  
sets the remote to the TUNER operation mode.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
2
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
2 Press the DTV MENU CLASS button  
repeatedly to select a class number.  
Each press switches the display:  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
3
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
CLASS A  
CLASS B  
CLASS C  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
3 Use the NUMBER buttons to select  
the channel you desire.  
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
To select channel 7, press 7.  
To select channel 0, press `.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
For example : If 99.50 MHz (FM) was memorized in  
class A at channel 7.  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
To step through each channel in order  
Press the STATION /+ buttons repeatedly.  
3
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
MU  
IN  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
VCR  
VCR2  
CD  
TAPE1/MD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
OFF  
ON  
INPUT SELECTOR  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MU  
C
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
1
2
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RemoteControlofOther Components  
Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other  
Components  
In addition to controlling the receiver, the supplied remote control can operate your other components (VCR, TV,  
DVD, CD, etc.) after you program it to do so. In this way, instead of fumbling with many different controls and  
buttons, you only need to use one remote control. If your component(s) are listed in the remote control's  
memory, simply follow the steps below. If your component(s) are not listed, or if you want the remote to learn  
additional operations, you can use the learning mode to input the information from the remote controls supplied  
with your other components.  
Recalling Settings Stored in the Remote Control  
The following steps show you how to recall the setting stored in the remote control. Once a setting is recalled  
and the component assigned, you can use this remote to easily operate the component.  
To exit from the remote control setup mode at any time, press REMOTE SETUP.  
• See "Using Remote Control with Other Components" on pages 66 and 67 to operate your other com-  
ponents.  
memo  
• The display will disappear after one minute or so if no new commands are entered. Press any button  
to 'wake up' the remote and continue the process.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 PRESET should be selected (if it isn't  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it) and  
press ENTER.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
SELECT FUNCTION blinks in the display.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
(for example, DVD/LD) you want to  
set.  
TUNER EDIT  
1
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2-5  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
component you want to set up.  
Press ENTER.  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
MAKER appears in the remote control display.  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
name of the company that makes  
your component.  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
The company names appear in the remote control  
display. If there is more than one component type for  
that company that makes your component then –1, –2,  
etc., will appear in the display. Choose one of the  
types and see if that works.  
memo  
The TUNER button cannot be assigned.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
6 Point the remote control at the  
component you want set and press  
ENTER.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
OK? will appear in the remote control display.  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
6-9  
RETURN  
If the component you are trying to control turns on/off  
you have set it correctly. Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
YES and go on to step 7.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
If the component you are trying to control does not  
turn on/off the correct preset code has not been  
selected. In this case, use the 5∞ buttons to select  
NO, press ENTER and go back to step 5. Try another  
preset code for that maker. (If the component you are  
trying to setup doesn't have a standby/on mode it  
won't turn on even if the correct preset code is  
entered. In this case select YES and go on to step 7.)  
If you can't seem to get the component you are trying  
to set to turn on or off you can still set up your remote  
control by using the LEARNING mode (on the next  
page).  
7 Press ENTER. The preset code has  
been entered.  
COMPLETE will appear in the display.  
Naturally it's easiest and most logical to assign the  
button that has the same name as the component you  
are setting up (for example, choose the DVD/LD button  
for your DVD player).  
You may find you have components which do not  
correspond to the name on any MULTI CONTROL  
button (for example a cable TV tuner) or you have two  
components where only one button is provided (for  
example, CD-R/TAPE 1). In this case, use step 3 to  
assign any available MULTI CONTROL button to the  
component you want to remote control.  
For example, you may have both a CD-R and a tape  
deck in your system but only one video deck. It would  
make sense to assign the CD-R/TAPE 1 MULTI  
CONTROL button to the CD-R and the VCR 2 MULTI  
CONTROL button to your tape deck. To do this choose  
VCR 2 in step 3 when you want to set up the tape  
deck. Then choose TAPE in step 4 and proceed as  
above. The only practical difference in this method is  
that you have to remember the VCR 2 MULTI CON-  
TROL button is actually your tape deck.  
In this case, you would need to hook up your tape  
deck to the input jacks marked VCR 2 on the back of  
the receiver.  
This method should help you customize the remote  
control for your system and let you control all of your  
components with the remote control for the VSX-47TX.  
8 Repeat the process from step 2 for  
all of your components.  
9 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Programming Signals from Other Remote Controls (LEARNING Mode)  
If preset codes are not available for your component(s), or the available preset codes do not operate correctly,  
you can use this procedure to program in signals from the remote control(s) of your other component(s). These  
steps can also be used to add further operations to the remote control that were successfully set with the  
stored settings (see p.62-63).  
To exit from the remote control setup mode at any time, press REMOTE SETUP.  
You can also program the 5˜∞˜2˜3 and ENTER buttons with the LEARNING mode.  
The TUNER button cannot be assigned.  
memo  
The display will disappear after one minute or so if no new commands are entered. Press any button  
to 'wake up' the remote and continue the process.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
LEARNING and press ENTER.  
SELECT FUNCTION blinks on the remote control.  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component you want to  
control.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
1
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
For example DVD/LD  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
SELECT KEY flashes in the display.  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
4 Choose the command you want to  
teach the remote control and press  
the corresponding button. The word  
LEARN will blink in the remote  
control display.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
For example, choose the 3 (play) button to program  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
this remote control to play your DVD player.  
AXD7290  
The TV POWER, TV FUNC, TV CH +/and VOL +/–  
buttons are only available for learning when  
programming TV CONT button.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
5 While LEARN continues to flash,  
point the two remote controls  
toward each other. Press the button  
on the other remote control  
corresponding to the operation you  
want to program.  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
2-8 inches  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
After the process is complete and the command has  
been learned, OK will appear in the remote control  
display. If NG (no good) appears, it means that for  
some reason the command was not learned. In this  
case, repeat steps 4 and 5.  
CONTINUE? appears in the remote's display.  
If SELECT KEY is flashing go back to step 4.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
6~7,  
9,10  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
6 If you want to program in more  
commands use the 5∞ buttons to  
select YES. Press ENTER.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to teach the remote control of  
the VSX-47TX all the commands from the other remote  
control.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
7 If you want to program in more  
commands for another MULTI  
CONTROL button use the 5∞  
buttons to select NO. Press ENTER.  
8 Repeat the process from step 2 for  
all of your components.  
Start again to program other components in this  
manner.  
If FULL appears in step 5 it means  
that there isn't enough capacity to  
learn this command. If you want to  
clear other buttons to make room for  
this one follow the procedure on p.86.  
memo  
9 When you're done use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT.  
You will return to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
If there isn't enough capacity, an in-  
correct signal has been sent or, in  
some cases, the command from an-  
other remote control simply cannot  
be learned, "NG" (no good) will appear  
in the display in step 5.  
10 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
In some "NG" cases the remotes just  
need to be moved closer together or  
farther apart.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Using Remote Control with Other Components  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/DVD recorder/Cassette Deck operations  
The following operations are available from the receiver's remote control after you program it  
(see “Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other Components,“ p.62-65).  
• To perform these operations, press the MULTI CONTROL button for the component you want to  
control.  
memo  
• For more information on individual commands consult the manual that came with the component.  
Button(s)  
Function  
Components  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
SOURCE  
Press to switch the components between STANDBY and ON.  
Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Repeated presses  
skips to the start of previous tracks or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
4
¢
Go back channels (channel ).  
VCR/DVD recorder  
Cassette deck  
Play the reverse side of the tape on a reversible deck.  
Press to advance to the start of the next track or chapter. Repeated presses  
skips to the start of following tracks or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
Go forward channels (channel +).  
VCR/DVD recorder  
Cassette deck  
Play the forward side of the tape on a reversible deck.  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
8
Pause playback or recording.  
Hold down for fast forward playback.  
Hold down for fast reverse playback.  
Start playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
¡
1
3
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
Stop playback (on some models, pressing this when the disc is already  
stopped will cause the disc tray to open).  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
7
MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD recorder/  
Cassette deck  
Starts recording.  
Directly access tracks on a program source.  
Directly access chapter on a program source.  
Directly select a channel.  
CD/MD/CD-R/LD  
DVD/DVD recorder  
VCR/DVD recorder  
Number  
Buttons  
Select tracks or chapter higher than 10. Press this button and the remaining  
number to get the track or chapter (+10 Button + 3= track or chapter 13).  
Some components may operate differently.  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/  
DVD/LD/DVD recorder  
+10 Button  
ENTER/DISP  
MODE  
Search mode  
DVD  
Takes you to the disc navigator.  
Changes between sides A & B of the disc.  
Select channel 12 directly.  
Select the disc.  
DVD recorder  
LD  
VCR  
CD/MD/CD-R  
MENU  
Displays menus concerning the current DVD or DVR you are using.  
Displays the top menu of the current DVD or DVR you are using.  
Takes you to the previous menu.  
DVD/DVD recorder  
DVD/DVD recorder  
DVD/DVD recorder  
GUIDE  
RETURN  
2 3 5∞ &  
ENTER  
Navigate DVD menus/options.  
Basic playback options.  
DVD/DVD recorder  
Double cassette 2nd deck  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Cable TV/Satellite TV/Digital TV/TVoperations  
The following operations are available from the receiver's remote control after you program it  
(see Setting Up the Remote Control to Control Other Components,p.62-65).  
To perform these operations, press the MULTI CONTROL button for the component you want to  
control.  
memo  
For more information on individual commands consult the manual that came with the component.  
Button(s)  
TV  
Function  
Press to switch the TV or CATV between STANDBY and ON.  
Press to switch the TV input.  
Components  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
TV  
TV INPUT  
TV CH (+/) Select channels.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
VOLUME  
(+/)  
Adjust the TV volume.  
TV  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV/  
Digital TV  
MENU  
Takes you to the TV menu of that system.  
Takes you to the guide menu of that system.  
Exits the menu you are viewing.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV/  
Digital TV  
GUIDE  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ Digital  
TV  
RETURN  
A/BLUE  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Satellite TV  
B/DTV menu  
C/GREEN  
D/RED  
8
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
1
3
E/YELLOW  
¡
Number  
Buttons  
(+10/.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV/  
Digital TV  
Use to select a specific TV channel.  
Buttons)  
ENTER/DISP  
MODE  
Use this button to immediately enter a new channel.  
Cable TV/ TV  
2 3 5∞ &  
ENTER  
Press to select or adjust and navigate items on the menu screen.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
The first four buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CONT button. Thus if you  
only have one TV hooked up to this system, assign it to the TV CONT button. If you have two TVs,  
assign the main TV to the TV CONT button. If you hook up your system this way, the first four TV  
controls will always be accessible.  
memo  
For example, if you connect your TV to TV monitor, then use TV CONT for your TV. If you connect your  
TV to input source then use TV.  
Depending on the maker and individual model, there are some buttons that may not be able operate  
some equipment or may operate it in a different way.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control of Other Components  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION  
The direct function will not be necessary for most users. It is designed in case you have an external video  
source connected to your TV (a video source that is not going through the VSX-47TX). For this explanation we'll  
call this the "external video deck." You'd like to control external video deck with this unit's remote control so  
you've assigned it a function button (for example purposes, the VCR 2 button). Yet, if you put the receiver in  
VCR 2 mode you'll get no picture on your TV because the external video deck signal is not going through the  
VSX-47TX. To get around this problem you set the DIRECT FUNCTION for VCR 2 to OFF. Now when you press  
VCR 2 function button you can control the external video deck with the remote but the receiver does not go into  
VCR 2 mode.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
3
DIRCTFNC and press ENTER.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
SELECT FUNCTION will flash in the remote control  
display.  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button of  
the component whose direct  
TUNER EDIT  
1,6  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2,4  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
function you want to turn on or off.  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
DIRECTFUNC appears on the remote control display.  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select ON,  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
OFF, or EXIT and press ENTER.  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
ON: The direct function is on.  
OFF: The direct function is off.  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
EXIT: Leaves the DIRECT FUNCTION settings and  
returns you to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
After you press ENTER, if you chose one of the first  
two settings, COMPLETE will appear in the display.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
5 Repeat steps 2-4 to set the direct  
function for as many components as  
you want.  
To exit from the remote control  
setup mode at any time, press  
REMOTE SETUP.  
memo  
6 Press the REMOTE SETUP button to  
return to the previous mode.  
The default setting for all DIRECT  
FUNCTIONs is ON.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Recording from Audio/Video Components  
The following explanations show you how make a recording from one component to another connected to this receiver.  
Note that an analog recorder (such as a VCR) cannot record from a source that is connected using only a digital  
connection. Likewise, a digital recorder (such as a CD-R) cannot record digitally from a component that is connected using  
only analog connections. In both of these cases, make sure that the digital component also has analog connections to the  
receiver, and that the SIGNAL SELECT is set to ANALOG.  
When recording from one digital component to another, bear in mind that the digital signal output from this receiver  
mirrors the input from the source. So if the input is, say, Dolby Digital, the output will also be Dolby Digital. Before  
recording, make sure that the recorder is compatible with the source digital audio format.  
See p.20 for more on analog audio connections and p.22-23 for digital audio connections.  
• The receiver's volume, channel level, balance, TONE, Digital NR, MIDNIGHT, LOUDNESS, ACOUSTIC  
CAL EQ and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.  
memo  
• In some cases, digital recordings have copy guard protections and making a digital copy is not possible.  
In this case you can only copy them in an analog manner.  
• When the source is the connected to the MULTI CH IN jacks, only the front left/right channels can be  
recorded.  
• Some video recordings are copy-protected; these sources cannot be recorded.  
• When recording video, the source must be connected to the receiver using the same type of video  
cord (composite, or S video) as you used to connect the recorder to the receiver.  
Functions that can be recorded  
1 Select the source component. Set  
SIGNAL SELECT according to the  
source component's signal (ANALOG  
or DIGITAL).  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Start recording (tape deck, CD  
recorder, VCR, etc.)  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
3 Playback the source to be recorded.  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
1
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
Record monitor (TAPE 2 MONITOR)  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GU DE  
EXIT  
If you connect a cassette deck with a record monitor function  
to the TAPE 2 MONITOR jacks, you can listen to the sound of  
an analog recording as it is being recorded.  
RETURN  
Press TAPE 2 MONITOR to switch between the sound of the  
recording (TAPE 2 indicator on) and the sound of the source  
component (TAPE 2 indicator off).  
• To record the TAPE 2 MONITOR signal to a recorder  
connected to the CD-R/TAPE 1 inputs, select any  
memo  
input except CD-R/TAPE 1 and switch the TAPE 2  
MONITOR on.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Speaker System B Setup  
Stereo playback in another room  
Connect a pair of speakers to the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (kitchen,  
bedroom, etc.). Select NORMAL SURROUND and choose the speaker system setup that you want.  
See the next page for more details on these speaker system settings.  
Please use speakers with a nominal impedance rated 6-16.  
Bi-amping the front speakers  
For bi-amp playback you can connect both the A and B speaker terminals to your front speakers. To do this  
your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they must have separate terminals for the high and low  
frequencies).  
Bi-amping delivers more power to the front speakers, but disables the surround back speakers, so you will  
be limited to 5.1 channel playback.  
1 Connect your speakers as  
shown.  
Since both Front A and B speaker terminals  
output the same audio, it doesnt matter which  
set (A or B) is powering which part (HI or LOW)  
of the speaker.  
Caution!  
Do not allow any speaker wire from any  
terminal to touch a wire from a different  
terminal.  
2 Select BI-AMP(5.1). If you need  
more information on how to do  
Watch that +/- connections  
are properly inserted (they  
are in opposite positions for  
A and B speaker terminals).  
this see page 37, step 3.  
The surround back channel amplifier is now  
used to power the B set of speaker terminals  
and the A+B (SP3AB) speaker setting is  
automatically selected. The speaker setting in  
this case can only be A+B or OFF.  
·
ª
Å
L
FRONT  
R
FRONT Speaker  
rear side  
Caution!  
CENTER  
Most speakers with both Hi and Low  
terminals have two metal plates that  
connect the Hi to the Low terminals.  
These must be removed when you are  
bi-amping the speakers or you could  
severely damage the amplifier. See your  
speaker manual for more information.  
·
ª
L
Hi  
SUR-  
ROUND  
R
·
ı
ª
(Single)  
L
L
Lo  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
R
Bi-wiring your speakers  
In order to do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they must have  
separate terminals for the high and low frequencies).  
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two sets of speaker cords to each speaker  
terminal on the receiver. The easiest way to do this is to connect one wire in  
the normal way, and use a banana plug for the other one. Make sure you use  
a parallel (not series) connection when doing so. Don't connect different speak-  
ers from the same terminal in this way.  
70 When using this kind of connection, select NORMAL SURROUND.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Switching A/B Speaker System  
This unit has three types of speaker systems A, B, A&B. This switch allows you to select the speaker system  
you will use.  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
1 Press the RECEIVER button.  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
TUNER  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
RECEIVER  
1
2
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
2 Use the SPEAKER A/B button on the  
remote control (or SP SYSTEM A/B  
on the front panel) to cycle through  
the different speaker systems.  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
The button cycles through the speaker systems as  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
follows: A]B]A&B]off.  
In what way the sound will be output depends on  
the selections you made in "SPEAKER SYSTEMS"  
(p.36) and your choices here. See the explanations  
for a guide to how the sound will be output when  
you have chosen NORMAL SURROUND (see p.36-  
37  
A(SP3A):  
Sound is output from speaker system A and the same  
signal is output from the pre out terminals.  
2
B(SP3B):  
Sound is output from the two speakers in speaker  
system B. Multichannel sources will be downmixed to  
these two speakers and the same signal is output from  
the FRONT pre outs.  
A&B(SP3AB):  
Sound is output from speaker system A's FRONT  
speakers and the B speakers. The other channels  
(excluding the LFE channel) will be downmixed to the  
FRONT speakers. If you have set the FRONT speakers  
to "SMALL" the low frequencies of all the channels are  
output from the subwoofer. The same sound is output  
from the B speakers and the FRONT pre out terminals.  
OFF(SP3 ):  
No sound is output from the speakers. Depending on  
the input signal and settings in "SPEAKER SYSTEMS"  
sound may be output from the subwoofer. The same  
sound is output from the pre out terminals as when  
selecting speaker system A (above).  
What is output from the subwoofer depends on the SPEAKER SYSTEM settings and the type of  
source.  
memo  
Depending on the settings in "SPEAKER SYSTEMS" and the MULTI CH IN SELECT, output from the  
SURROUND BACK pre out terminals may change.  
When using headphones the speakers are switched off.  
Please use speakers with a nominal impedance rated 6-16.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Connecting Additional Amplifiers  
This receiver has more than sufficient power for any home use, but it is possible to add additional amplifiers to  
every channel of your system. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet. Take out the U-shaped connectors (see p.30) if you connect an external amp to power the  
front left and right speakers.  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
R
Front channel amplifier  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
2
OUT  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
1
OUT  
Center channel amplifier  
(mono)  
AUIO  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
4
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
Powered subwoofer  
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
SUB W.  
3
IN  
PLAY  
PRE OUT  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
IN  
1
2
(Single)  
SUR-  
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
IN  
IN  
2
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
L
R
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
Surround channel amplifier  
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
R
R
L (Single)  
L
R
(For LD)  
Surround back channel  
amplifier  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channels for a single speaker as well. In this  
case plug the amplifier into the L (SINGLE) terminal only.  
memo  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Pre Out Power Setup  
Using an separate stereo pre-amplifier  
It is possible to use a separate stereo pre-amp in conjunction with this receiver. You might want to do this  
if you need to connect more sources than this receiver can accommodate.  
You can connect sources to either this receiver or to the external pre-amp (giving you a greater number of  
input possibilities). For stereo sources connected directly to the external pre-amp, this receiver acts as a  
standard power amplifier. For digital sources connected to this receiver, the receiver acts as a digital  
decoder/digital-to-analog converter and as a power amplifier.  
1
2
Remove the U-shaped connectors that connect the FRONT PRE OUT jacks to the POWER AMP IN  
jacks.  
Use a stereo RCA audio cable to connect the FRONT PRE OUT jacks of this receiver to a stereo input  
on the pre-amp.  
Use any input except phono.  
3
Use a stereo RCA audio cable to connect the stereo pre-out jack of the pre-amp to the POWER AMP  
IN jack of this receiver.  
Using a separate power amplifier for main room stereo sound  
An alternative multi room setup involves using a separate power amplifier to power a pair of stereo  
speakers in the main room, while using this receiver to power the sub-room speakers. You might want to  
do this if your power requirements for the main room are not met by this receiver.  
1
2
Connect the MULTI ROOM OUT jacks to the POWER AMP IN jacks (both on this receiver).  
Use a stereo RCA audio cable to connect the FRONT PRE OUT jacks of this receiver to the power  
amps inputs.  
3
4
Connect the sub room speakers to the FRONT A speaker outputs on this receiver.  
Connect the main room speakers to the speaker outputs on the power amp.  
Sub Room  
Main Room  
COROL  
Å
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OUT  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
AC OUTLET  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
L
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
IN  
ROOM  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
AUDIO  
FRONT  
R
L
PHONO  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
ANTENNA  
Y
IN  
R
Y
AUDIO  
1
75FUMNBAL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
IN  
P
B
R
P
B
R
R
L
CENTER  
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
P
P
R
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
4
OUT  
REC  
CENTE
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
AC IN  
L
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
SUR-  
ROUND  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
R
P
P
B
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
R
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
SELECTABLE  
L
P
ı
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
(Single)  
L
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
SUR-  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
R
R
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
main room  
surround channels  
High-powered stereo power  
amplifier and front speakers  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Multi-Room  
When used together with an optional IR receiver, this receiver is capable of outputting two different sources at  
the same time. One to the VIDEO OUT jack and SPEAKERS terminals and another to the MULTI ROOM &  
SOURCE AUDIO and VIDEO OUT jacks. Thus the VSX-47TX can power two independent systems, in separate  
rooms, listening to or watching different sources. With this system the two rooms can have completely  
independent power (the main room power can be off while the sub room is on) and the sub room can be  
controlled by this unit's remote control. If you go into the main room to change the source but forget the remote  
control it's not a problem. While in MULTI ROOM mode the input selector on the front panel of the VSX-47TX is  
able to change the input even though the receiver is off.  
MULTI-ROOM connections  
On the VSX-47TX, connect the IR receiver sensor to the MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE REMOTE IN jack, then  
connect a separate amplifier (and speakers) and TV monitor to the MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUT jacks. All of this equipment should be placed in your sub-room as shown below.  
When connecting the IR receiver, be sure to connect it to the green MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE RE-  
MOTE IN jack, not the black CONTROL IN or OUT jacks.  
memo  
It is not possible to input digital signals into the sub room. You must use an analog signal.  
You can't use tone controls (etc.) or any surround modes in the sub room.  
Sub room  
Main room  
CONTROL  
Å
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OUT  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
AC OUTLET  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
L
2
OUT  
MULTI-  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
ROOM  
&
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
AUDIO  
FRONT  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
1
OUT  
DVD  
/LD  
IN  
ANTENNA  
IN  
IN  
Y
R
Y
AUDIO  
1
75FUMNBAL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
POWER AMP  
IN  
TV  
IN  
DIGITAL  
PCM/2DIGITAL/DTS  
R
R
L
PB  
P
B
CENTER  
FRONT  
L
5
(CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
PR  
P
R
R
L
(TV)  
IN  
(SAT)  
IN  
4
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
(VCR1  
/DVR)  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
AC IN  
L
IN  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
Y
Y
VCR1  
/DVR  
SUB W.  
SUR-  
ROUND  
3
IN  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
PRE OUT  
IN  
PLAY  
1
2
P
B
P
B
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
R
OUT  
REC  
ROUND  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
SELECTABLE  
L
P
R
P
ı
R
L
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
SUR-  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
IN  
PLAY  
1
(Single)  
L
R
L (Single)  
CENTER  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
SUR-  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
L
L
SUR-  
SUR-  
R
R
ROUND  
ROUND  
BACK  
(DVD  
/LD)  
2RF  
IN  
R
R
L (Single)  
(For LD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
IR receiver  
(MR-100)  
Setup example  
Sub room  
(MR-100, amplifier,  
speakers  
and TV monitor)  
Main room  
(Receiver, source components,  
front, center, and surround  
speakers, TV monitor etc.)  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
MULTI-ROOM setup  
1 Turn on the receiver, your TV and  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
SETUP  
Make sure your TV is set to the receiver.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button  
then select EXPERT SETUP using 5  
and . Press ENTER.  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
The EXPERT SETUP menu appears on the OSD.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
MULTI-ROOM SETTING . Press  
ENTER.  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
2
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
3~7  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4 Select the VOLUME LEVEL by  
selecting VARIABLE or FIXED.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
If you hook up a just a power amplifier in the sub room  
the VSX-47TX will act as a pre-amp. In this case  
choose VARIABLE for the VOLUME LEVEL setting. If  
you hook up a full integrated amplifier in the sub room  
(such as another Pioneer VSX receiver) choose FIXED  
for the VOLUME LEVEL setting.  
System Setup  
2
3
[Auto Surround Setup]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
CAUTION!  
If the MULTI ROOM is set to FIXED the volume on the main  
unit will be set to maximum. Thus, when output, it will be  
extremely loud. Please set the master volume controls of the  
integrated amplifier in the sub room very low at first and ex-  
periment to find the correct volume.  
3.Expert Setup  
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level]  
[3. D-Range Control]  
[4. Multi-Ch In Select]  
[5. Function Renane]  
[6. Multi-Room Setting ]  
g]  
5 Select the IR RECEIVER type.  
If you have an IR receiver from a different company  
than PIONEER, select OTHERS. If you have the  
Pioneer-made MR-100, or the IR receiver you're using  
doesn't seem to work after selecting OTHERS, select  
PIONEER.  
4.6. Multi-Room Setting  
Volume Level  
4
[
VARIABLE  
]
IR Receiver  
[
PIONEER  
]
[Return]  
CAUTION: If the "FIXED"  
position is chosen,the  
volume will be loud.  
6 Select RETURN (use ∞5) then press  
ENTER to go back to the EXPERT  
SETUP menu.  
4.6. Multi-Room Setting  
Volume Level  
[
FIXED  
]
IR Receiver  
[
PIONEER  
]
7 Use the ∞5 buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER, again.  
Then use the ∞5 buttons to select  
EXIT and press ENTER.  
[Return]  
4.6. Multi-Room Setting  
Volume Level  
5
6
[
VARIABLE  
]
IR Receiver  
[
OTHERS  
]
[Return]  
There may be some IR receivers that can't be  
used with this receiver. Check with a PIONEER  
representative to be sure.  
memo  
3.6. Multi-Room Setting  
Volume Level  
[
VARIABLE  
]
IR Receiver  
[
OTHERS  
]
[Return]  
CAUTION: If the "FIXED"  
position is chosen,the  
volume will be loud.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Controlling the MULTI-ROOM system from the main room  
1 Press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE  
ON/OFF button to turn on the  
MULTI ROOM system.  
3
2
4
1
The display shown below will illuminate when the  
receiver is in STANDBY mode.  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER  
LISTENING MODE SELECTOR  
VSX-47TX  
Also, the MULTI ROOM indicator will light.  
MAC3  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
TAPE1/MD  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CR  
VCR2  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
MR&S ON  
MASTER VOLUME  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2 Press the CONTROL button to enter  
the control mode.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
All operations regarding the sub-room MUST be  
made while "MULTI ROOM" appears in the  
receiver's display. Once it reverts to its previous  
display any adjustments will affect the main room,  
not the sub room.  
3 Select the source with the INPUT  
SELECTOR and adjust the VOLUME.  
The volume can be adjusted in a  
range of -60dB to 0dB.  
3
If you have selected FIXED for the volume level in the  
Multi-Room Setup (previous page), you can't adjust the  
volume.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
OFF  
ON  
For this example we'll use the DVD/LD function. The  
display shown below will illuminate.  
INPUT SELECTOR  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
BASS/  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VID  
SE  
The volume doesn't  
appear if you  
selected FIXED.  
MULTI ROOM  
DVD/LD -6O  
The INPUT SELECTOR steps through the functions in  
the following order:  
3
3
3
3
DVD/LD  
TUNER  
TV  
SAT  
VCR1/DVR  
CD  
3
3
3
CD-R/TAPE1  
If you don't turn the MULTI ROOM  
function off the receiver will not turn  
off completely.  
memo  
4 When in TUNER function, press the  
CLASS button and use STATION -/+  
to select the station.  
The display will appear as shown below.  
MULTI ROOM  
FM 87.5OMHz  
«
MULTI ROOM  
A2 87.5OMHz  
Press CONTROL at any time to exit the control mode  
of the MULTI ROOM system.  
Press MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/OFF button at any  
time to turn off the MULTI ROOM system.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Controlling the MULTI-ROOM system from the sub room  
1 From the sub room, point the  
remote control at the IR Receiver  
and press a STANDBY/ON  
button to turn on the MULTI-  
ROOM system.  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
RECEIVER  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
MULTI  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CONTROL  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
The MULTI ROOM & SOURCE indicator lights on  
the front panel in the main room.  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
Number  
button  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
2 Press the INPUT button to select  
the sub room source.  
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
You can also use a specific MULTI CONTROL button  
(for example, the DVD/LD button) for this purpose.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
CLASS  
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
3 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the  
volume.  
STATION –/+  
VOLUME +/–  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
The following remote control buttons can be  
used to operate the receiver from the sub room.  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
INPUT  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
RECEIVER button  
MULTI CONTROL button (will not select  
PHONO, VCR 2 or VIDEO)  
VOLUME +/– buttons (for adjusting the sub-  
room's volume level, but can't be used when set  
to FIXED)  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
memo  
If the main power ON/OFF button has been switched  
OFF, you can't use the MULTI ROOM function. Make  
sure the system is in STANDBY mode or ON.  
When someone is controlling the system from the  
main room you won't be able to operate the remote  
room controls.  
CLASS button (for selecting the memory class  
you want)  
STATION –/+ button (for recalling memorized  
radio stations (the tuner is selected automati-  
cally))  
When you are doing the system setup process the  
MULTI-ROOM cannot be used.  
Number button (0~9)  
If you use a PIONEER amplifier in the sub room,  
when you want to control the VSX-47TX only you  
will also change the settings in the sub room. To  
avoid this, cover up the remote sensor on the sub  
room amplifier.  
Sub room  
Main room  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER VSX-47TX  
LISTENING MODE SELECTOR  
STANDBY/ON  
MAC3  
STANDBY  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
TAPE1/MD  
MULTI  
CH  
OFF  
ON  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
VCR  
VCR2  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
INPUT  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MASTER VOLUME  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/CD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
IR Receiver  
S0  
URCE  
S
E
T
U
D
P
V
TV  
D
/
L
D
V
C
M
D
V
R
SY  
FF  
1
U
R
/
LTI  
C
TV  
STEM  
CD  
O
D
VC  
O
NTRO  
IM  
M
R2  
1
ER  
SAT  
AM  
V
C
D
ID  
TA  
L
VIDE  
EO  
P
IN  
P
-R  
/
1
S
E
5
EL  
P
U
TO  
T
A
T
V
N
S
6
2
TT  
T
O
C
O
E
IG  
U
S
9
N
Y
A
L
N
N
T
S
LO  
TE  
B
E
OP  
M
AS  
S
EL  
U
D
R
ER UL  
AT TI  
IO  
M
M
E
S
ET  
S
/
N
ES  
N
U
TR  
3
N
U
P
1
EBL  
TA  
S
A
M
0
P
S
S
0
E
E
P
P
TA  
2
EA  
G
X
TU  
7
K
U
S
EF  
ER  
ID  
E
D
IR  
11  
FE  
4
A
/
M
EC  
+
C
T
B
P
T
1
/C  
H
TU  
1IN  
E
A
C
0
8
S
E
N
N
C
ES  
R
L
L
T
S
+
G
E
R
S
D
1
D
IS  
TA  
4
EM IS  
O
P
TE  
2
TI  
M
C
O
RF  
O
C
N
H
A
S
D
E
A
TT  
ET  
U
P
N
8
N
EL  
BA  
N
D
EX  
IT  
R
TV  
ET  
U
C
LA  
V
O
S
R
N
TV  
7
S
EX  
T
RA  
L
TV  
IN  
C
PU  
TU  
M
E
NU  
O
T
N
¡
N
IN  
G
TR  
TV  
C
O
L
S
+
T
IN  
TA  
H
X
TI  
O
P
H
U
C
¢
N
AD  
T
H
+
V
A
S
M
A
N
N
C
I
N
U
ID  
N
IG  
NC  
A
R
EM  
ED  
R
EL  
+
O
S
TA  
H
T
AC  
OU  
CA ST  
U
N
N
DA  
D
IG  
N
D
R
D
L
IC  
AD  
CO VA  
NC NC  
ER ED  
R
IT  
A
V
O
(D  
L
V
S
DIR  
LUM  
D
/
TE  
M
-A  
/
T
L
R
U
S
IS  
E
O
E
IN LT  
PU  
A
CD  
T
E
I
C
M
E
C
T
A
T
H
)
OD IN  
E
N
V
G
P
M
U
T
R
E
LI  
-P  
CH ST  
S
R
EN  
E
R
O
G
E
L
I
N
E
R
A
EC  
T
G
M
O
M
M
E
T
E
C
L
A
O
D
IG  
H
T
X
N
A
N
D
7
T
R
D
2
O
L
9
L
E
0
U
N
A
Î
IT  
R
N
IN  
G
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the  
IR receiver remote sensor window.  
memo  
The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one  
room also changes the station in the other room. Please be careful not to change stations when  
recording a radio broadcast.  
The volume levels of the main and sub rooms are independent.  
When more than one remote control signal is transmitted at the same time, the receiver does not  
operate.  
When operating MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE with the MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE OUT jacks connected  
to a sub room amplifier which bears the PIONEER Î mark and has a remote sensor, both the IR  
receiver and the amplifier may receive remote control commands (making correct operation impos-  
sible). In this case, place the IR receiver and amplifier apart from each other, and point the remote  
control directly at the IR receiver during operation.  
If you plan to leave the MULTI ROOM feature off for a lengthy period please turn off the power in both  
the sub and main rooms. Make sure the STANDBY indicator turns red and the MULTI ROOM indicator  
goes off.  
If you send the SYSTEM OFF command from the sub room by remote control, the power of both  
rooms will go off. Please be careful when making a recording in the main room.  
The PIONEER SR System: Operating other PIONEER  
components  
Connecting an optional control cord allows you to operate other PIONEER components simply by pointing the  
receiver's remote control at the remote sensor on the front panel of the receiver. The receiver then sends the  
remote control signals to the other devices via the CONTROL OUT terminal.  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
Receiver  
PIONEER  
component bearing  
the Î mark.  
SETUP  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
L
O
U
D
N
E
S
S
S
P
E
A
K
E
R
A
/
B
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
To CONTROL IN  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
9
0
ENTER  
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
RETURN  
terminal of another  
PIONEER component  
bearing the Î mark.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
T
V
I
N
P
U
T
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
Remote Control  
You can also control PIONEER components (and those made by other manufacturers) by pointing the  
receiver's remote control directly at the respective component. This type of operation does not re-  
quire control cords. All you have to do is recall the appropriate stored settings (see p.62- 63).  
If you use a remote control hooked up via the CONTROL IN jack with a control cord, you won't be able  
to use this unit's remote control.  
memo  
If you use this feature make sure an analog (audio and/or video) connection has been made between  
the units.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Multi Operations  
Multi operations allow you to tell the receiver and your other components to do a number of things with the  
push of only two buttons on the remote control (see "Performing Multi Operations" on the next page). For  
example, you can program the unit to turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded  
DVD. This allows you to freely decide which operations you want performed as well as the order in which you  
want them performed. The steps below show you how to program a string of up to 5 different operations for  
each MULTI CONTROL button. You don't need to program the power of this receiver (or any Pioneer  
component used) to go on, it (or they) will do so automatically when multi operations are performed.  
Be sure to set up each component before programming multi operations (see Setting Up the  
Remote Control to Control Other Components, p.62-65).  
memo  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
more than three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select MULTI  
SETUP  
OPE and press ENTER.  
SELECT FUNCTION blinks on the remote display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component you want to start  
the MULTI OPERATIONS with.  
MULTI OPE appears in the display.  
For example, DVD/LD  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
3,6  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
1
ENTER  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select first  
command. "1st Cmmnd" appears in  
the display. Press ENTER.  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2,4,5  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
This tells the receiver this will be the first command.  
To erase a command  
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
Select CLEAR and press ENTER. Then go to step 8.  
To go back one step  
Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
5 To setup a command select CHANGE  
and press ENTER.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
FUNCTION flashes in the display,  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
6 Select the component whose  
command you want to input (for  
example, a DVD player), and press  
the MULTI CONTROL button for it.  
KEY will flash in the display.  
memo  
To exit from the remote setup mode at any-  
time press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press any  
button to 'wake up' the remote and continue  
the process.  
7 Select a button for the command you  
want to input (for example, 3 [play]).  
COMPLETE appears in the display.  
8 Repeat steps 4-7 to program a  
sequence of up to five commands.  
You can assign MULTI OPERATIONS for up to 5  
commands for each MULTI CONTROL button.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
9 When done select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
SETUP  
You will return to the REMOTE SETUP menu. Start  
again from step 2 if you want to set do another MULTI  
CONTROL button.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
10 Select EXIT and press ENTER again.  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
You don't need to program power on for PIONEER  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
memo  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
components (except for the first generation of Pio-  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
neer DVRs), they will go on automatically if a com-  
mand for that unit is entered in the MULTI OPERA-  
TIONS settings. Also, your TV will go on automati-  
cally if a TV related command is entered in the  
MULTI OPERATIONS.  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
910  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
Performing Multi Operations  
Do the following to use the MULTI OPERATIONS.  
1 Press the MULTI OPERATION  
button.  
SETUP  
SELECT FUNCTION flashes in the display,  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component that has been set  
up with multi operations.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
2
1
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
The power of the receiver (and any Pioneer compo-  
nents use in the program) goes on and the pro-  
grammed multi operations are performed automati-  
cally.  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
System Off  
The SYSTEM OFF feature allows you to tell the receiver and your other components to stop and/or turn off with  
the push of only one button on the remote control. For example, you can program the unit to stop your DVD,  
turn off your TV and turn off your DVD player. You don't need to program power off for PIONEER components,  
they will go off automatically in this mode. The receiver itself will go off automatically as well.  
The steps below show you how to program a string of up to 5 different SYSTEM OFF operations.  
Be sure to set up each component before programming the SYSTEM OFF function (see Setting  
Up the Remote Control to Control Other Components, p.62-65).  
memo  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
more than three seconds.  
SETUP  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select SYS  
OFF and press ENTER.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
5
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
SYSTEM OFF appears in the remote display.  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select first  
command. "1st Cmmnd" appears in  
the display. Press ENTER.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
1
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2-4  
RETURN  
This tells the receiver this will be the first command.  
To erase a command  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
Select CLEAR and press ENTER. Then go to step 7.  
To go back one step  
Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
4 To setup a command select CHANGE  
and press ENTER.  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
FUNCTION flashes in the display,  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
5 Select the component whose  
command you want to input (for  
example, a DVD player), and press  
the MULTI CONTROL button for it.  
KEY will flash in the display.  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
6 Select a button for the command you  
want to input (for example, 7 [stop]).  
COMPLETE appears in the display.  
memo  
7 Repeat steps 3-6 to program a  
sequence of up to five commands.  
To exit from the remote setup mode at any-  
time press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press any  
button to 'wake up' the remote and continue  
the process.  
You can assign SYSTEM OFF information for up to 5  
commands.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
8 When done select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
SETUP  
You will return to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
9 Select EXIT and press ENTER again.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
8-9  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
Using System Off  
Do the following to use the SYSTEM OFF function.  
1 Press the SYSTEM OFF button.  
SETUP  
The remote control must be on to be able to use this  
command but it can be in any mode.  
All the components programmed into the SYSTEM  
OFF mode will stop and/or go off. The receiver and  
Pioneer components will go off as well.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
1
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Editing Remote Control Display Names  
Use this capability to rename the display on the remote control for different MULTI CONTROL buttons (DVD/LD,  
etc.). For example, you could change "TV" to "DVD2". In this way you can personalize your system. This is similar  
to the feature on p.95 but that feature changes the display on the receiver.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP for more  
SETUP  
than three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
FUNCNAME and press ENTER.  
SELECT FUNCTION will flash in the display.  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component you want to  
rename.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
1
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2,4-7  
RETURN  
MPX  
For example, "TV"  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
letters and/or numbers you want to  
enter and use the 2 3 buttons to  
move the cursor to the next  
position.  
4
¢
CHANNEL–  
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
Here are the possible letters/numbers.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
!#%&'()*+–./:;<=>?  
@[\]\^_`{|}~327¶ 8 ≠=+•(space)  
memo  
You can input up to eight letter/numbers.  
To exit from the remote setup mode at any-  
time press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
• The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press  
any button to 'wake up' the remote and con-  
tinue the process.  
5 When you're finished press ENTER,  
END will blink, press ENTER again.  
The COMPLETE appears in the display.  
6 Go back to step 2 to input as many  
function names as you want.  
7 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Editing Button Names (KEY LABEL)  
Use the KEY LABEL capability to rename the display on the remote control for different buttons (keys). You  
would want to do this if you taught a specific button a new operation.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP for more  
than three seconds.  
SETUP  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select KEY  
LABEL and press ENTER.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
SELECT FUNCTION will flash in the display.  
3
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component whose button  
you want to rename.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
1
For example DVD/LD  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2,5-8  
RETURN  
SELECT KEY flashes in the display.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
4 Press the buttons whose name you  
want to change.  
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
For example, 3  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
The name-changing screen appears in the display.  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
letters and/or numbers you want to  
enter and use the 2 3 buttons to  
move the cursor to the next  
position.  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
Here are the possible letters/numbers.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!#%&'()*+./:;<=>?  
@[\]\^_`{|}~327¶ 8 ≠=+(space)  
You can input up to eight letter/numbers.  
6 When you're finished press ENTER,  
END will blink, press ENTER again.  
COMPLETE appears in the display.  
memo  
To exit from the remote setup mode  
at anytime press the REMOTE SETUP  
button.  
The display will disappear after one  
minute or so if no new commands are  
entered. Press any button to 'wake up'  
the remote and continue the process.  
7 Go back to step 2 to input as many  
button names as you want.  
8 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Adjusting the Light on the Remote Control  
This feature allows you to adjust the brightness of the light on the remote control.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button for  
SETUP  
three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
LIGHT and press ENTER.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select HIGH,  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
LOW, or EXIT and press ENTER.  
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
HIGH: The brightest setting  
LOW : A dimmer setting  
EXIT : Leaves the LIGHT setting and returns you to  
the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
After pressing ENTER in the first two cases, COM-  
PLETE will appear in the display and you will be  
returned to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
TUNER EDIT  
1
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2-4  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
4 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
memo  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
To exit from the remote setup mode at any time press  
the REMOTE SETUP button.  
The display will disappear after one minute or so if no  
new commands are entered. Press any button to 'wake  
up' the remote and continue the process.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Clearing Remote Control Settings You Have Input  
This feature allows you to clear a particular setting, or all of the settings from a function in the REMOTE SETUP  
menu.  
1 Press the REMOTE SETUP button  
SETUP  
for three seconds.  
The REMOTE SETUP menu appears on the remote  
display.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
CLEAR and press ENTER.  
CLEAR appears in the display.  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
4
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select one  
setting, or all of the settings, and  
press ENTER.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
1
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
2,3  
6-7  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
The choices in this feature include:  
EXTRA MENU  
8
LEARNING CLEAR: allows you to clear one command  
you have set in the LEARNING function. After  
pressing ENTER SELECT FUNCTION flashes in the  
display. Go to step 4.  
KEYLABEL CLEAR: allows you to clear one button  
name you have set in the KEYLABEL function. After  
pressing ENTER SELECT FUNCTION flashes in the  
display. Go to step 4.  
TUNING  
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
TV INPUT  
INPUT  
MIDNIGHT  
TV CONTROL  
TV VOL  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV CH  
DIGITAL  
NR  
STEREO  
/DIRECT  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
LISTENING  
MODE  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
ALL CLEAR: Allows you to clear all the REMOTE  
SETUP settings. After pressing ENTER, CLEAR?  
appears in the display. Go to step 6.  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
LIGHT  
Î
EXIT: Returns you to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
AV PRE-PROGRAMMED AND LEARNING  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
AXD7290  
4 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the component whose command  
or key label you want to clear.  
SELECT KEY flashes in the display.  
memo  
To exit from the remote setup mode at any-  
time press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
The display will disappear after one minute or  
so if no new commands are entered. Press any  
button to 'wake up' the remote and continue  
the process.  
5 Press the button you want to clear.  
The button chosen will appear in the display. CLEAR?  
will appear in the display.  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select YES,  
NO or EXIT and press ENTER.  
YES: clears the setting.  
NO and EXIT: leaves the setting as is and returns you  
to the REMOTE SETUP menu.  
If you select YES and press ENTER then COMPLETE  
appears in the display and you are returned to the  
REMOTE SETUP menu.  
7 Select EXIT and press ENTER.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Resetting the Main Unit  
The following operations allow you to reset the unit to the default settings.  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER VSX-47TX  
1 While holding down the DIGITAL NR  
button press the STANDBY/ON  
button for about three seconds.  
LISTENING MODE SELECTOR  
STANDBY/ON  
MAC3  
STANDBY  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
TAPE1/MD  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
VCR  
VCR2  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
OFF  
ON  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MASTER VOLUME  
TONE  
BASS/TEREBLE  
TUNER  
STATION  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
CH SELECT  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
DIGITAL NR  
CLASS  
PHONES  
SP SYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
(DVD-A/SACD)  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITAL IN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
2 When you see RESET? appear in the  
display, press the TONE – button.  
OK? appears in the display, press  
TONE +.  
1
1
All the settings, including the speaker, surround sound  
settings and tuner settings will be reset the unit to the  
factory default settings.  
2
2
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
Assigning the Digital Inputs  
If you did not hook up your digital equipment in accordance with the default settings for the digital inputs  
(see p.17, 19 & 22-23) you need to complete the procedure below. You have to do this in order to tell the  
receiver what digital equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote correspond  
to what you have hooked up.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
DVD/LD  
TV  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
press the RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
TUNER  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
TUNER EDIT  
2
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
3~8  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
STAT ON  
DTV MENU CLASS  
STAT ON  
+
4 DIGITAL-IN SELECT should be  
selected, if not use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press the ENTER button.  
System Setup  
3
[ Auto Surround Setup ]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup]  
[3. Expert Setup]  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to move  
through the different digital input  
settings and use the 2 3 buttons to  
select the component that you  
hooked up to that digital in.  
[4. THX Audio Setup]  
[Exit]  
4
6
1.Input Assign  
[ 1.Digital-In Select ]  
[ 2.C' nent Vudeo In ]  
6 If you're not sure which component  
is connected to which digital in, look  
on the back of the receiver and  
[Return]  
check the cables you connected.  
1.1. Digital-In Select  
7 When you're finished use the 5∞  
buttons to select RETURN and press  
ENTER.  
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
Digital-5  
[DVD/LD]  
[
[
[
[
CD  
SAT  
VCR1  
CD-R  
]
]
]
]
RF IN  
[DVD/LD]  
This exits the "Assigning the Digital Inputs" mode.  
[Return]  
8 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER, again.  
Then, use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT and press ENTER.  
memo  
• The possible digital inputs that can be assigned  
are: DVD/LD, TV, SAT, VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1 (except for a 2 RF input which  
doesn't include CD, CD-R/TAPE 1).  
• If you assign a digital input to a certain function  
(for example DVD/LD) then any digital inputs pre-  
viously assigned to that function will automati-  
cally be set to OFF. This is because one func-  
tion cannot be assigned to two different places  
(except for RF IN).  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
Assigning the Component Video Inputs  
This receiver has three component video inputs. By default they act as video inputs for the DVD/LD, TV  
and SAT functions, but you can reassign them if you want to use them as video inputs for other receiver  
functions. For example, if you have a DVD recorder connected to the VCR1/DVR jacks and want to use its  
component video output, and you're not using the COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 jacks on this receiver, you  
can reassign the input from SAT to VCR1.  
See pages 1619 for more on connecting equipment using component video cords.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
SETUP  
press RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
3 Looking at the on-screen display on  
your TV, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
2
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
3-8  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
C'NENT VIDEO IN then press ENTER.  
System Setup  
3
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
component video input you want to  
reassign.  
[ Auto Surround Setup ]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup]  
[3. Expert Setup]  
In the example above, we would select C'NENT-IN 3.  
[4. THX Audio Setup]  
[Exit]  
6 Use the 2 3 buttons to assign a  
receiver function.  
Choose between DVD/LD, TV, SAT, VCR1 and VCR2.  
In the example above, we would select VCR1  
4
1.Input Assign  
[ 1.Digital-In Select ]  
[ 2.C'nent Video In]  
[Return]  
7 When you're finished use the 5∞  
buttons to select RETURN and press  
ENTER.  
You will leave the "Assigning the Component Video  
Inputs" mode.  
1.2. C' nent Video In  
5
6
C' nent-In1  
C' nent-In2  
C' nent-In3  
[DVD/LD ]  
[
[
TV  
SAT  
]
]
8 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER, again.  
Then, use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT and press ENTER.  
[Return]  
1.2. C' nent Video In  
C' nent-In1  
C' nent-In2  
C' nent-In3  
[ DVD/LD ]  
[
[
TV  
VCR1  
]
]
If you connect any source component to the  
memo  
receiver using a component video input, you  
should also have your TV connected to this  
receiver's component video output.  
[Return]  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
Expert Setup  
These settings are more advanced. Some could add depth or listenability to your sound (like the Dynamic Range  
Control) and others are for your convenience (like the Function Rename). You can decide if you want to make  
these settings or not. They are not crucial to good surround sound. You only need to make these settings once  
(unless you change the placement of your current speaker system, add new speakers or components to your  
system, etc.). These setup operations use your TV to display the settings and choices so be sure your TV and  
receiver are properly hooked up.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
press the RECEIVER on the remote  
SETUP  
control.  
Make sure your TV is set to the receiver.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
The menu possibilities appear on your TV.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
3 Select EXPERT SETUP with the 5∞  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
buttons. Press the ENTER button.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
2
3
4
ENTER  
4 Follow the order below to make  
advance settings. Use the 5∞  
buttons to navigate through the  
menus. When you have the setting  
you want in particular menu, press  
ENTER.  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
3~4  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
In each mode, the current settings are displayed  
automatically.  
System Setup  
OSD (ON-SCREEN DISPLAY) ADJUSTMENT (p.91)  
This feature allows you to adjust positioning of the  
display to fit your TV better.  
[Auto Surround Setup]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
BASS PEAK LEVEL (p.92)  
Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low  
bass tones. Set the bass peak level as needed to  
prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the  
sound from the speakers.  
[Exit]  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL (p.93)  
This feature makes possible excellent surround sound  
effects when listening to Dolby Digital sources at low  
volumes.  
4.Expert Setup  
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level]  
[3. D-Range Control]  
[4. Multi-Ch In Select]  
[5. Function Rename]  
[6. Multi-Room Setting]  
MULTI CH IN SELECT (p.94)  
This feature is for choosing an output method for  
people who have connected their DVD player up with  
multichannel analog inputs.  
[Return]  
FUNCTION RENAME (p.95)  
This feature allows you to change the names that  
appear in the receiver display to reflect what you have  
connected.  
MULTI ROOM (p.74-78)  
You can set up this unit to power systems in different  
rooms.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
OSD (On-screen Display) ADJUSTMENT  
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems difficult to see all the instructions on the screen. This  
adjustment basically lets you move the screen displays up or down and left or right to get a better match  
between the displays for this receiver and your TV.  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 90, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
1 OSD ADJUSTMENT should be  
SETUP  
selected, if it isn’t use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press ENTER.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Use the 2 3 5∞ buttons to move  
the display field around until you get  
one that you feel best suits your TV.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
3 Press ENTER.  
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
Your new screen display will be set. Next, move on to  
BASS PEAK LEVEL, if necessary.  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~5  
RETURN  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Start over from step one.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
4 If you want to continue EXPERT  
SETUP use the 5∞ buttons to select  
the next setup and press ENTER.  
Go on to the next page.  
4.Expert Setup  
1
2
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level]  
[3. D-Range Control]  
[4. Multi-Ch In Select]  
[5. Function Rename]  
[6. Multi-Room Setting]  
5 If you want to finish EXPERT SETUP  
use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER. Then use  
the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
[Return]  
3.1. OSD Adjustment  
[Return]  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
BASS PEAK LEVEL  
The LFE (Low Frequency Effect) channel in Dolby Digital, DTS program sources can produce heavily  
concentrated ultra-low bass tones that may exceed the capabilities of your speaker system. The following steps  
show you how to set the peak level for the LFE channel. If continuing from the preceding page the BASS PEAK  
LEVEL MANAGER should be selected.  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 90, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
SETUP  
1 BASS PEAK LEVEL should be  
selected if, it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press ENTER.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
SETTING START or SETTING  
CANCEL.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
SETTING START: The MASTER VOLUME is set to  
MIN (----dB), a test tone plays back and you make the  
setting (in step 3).  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
SETTING CANCEL: This setting won't limit the peak  
level of the LFE channel.  
For SETTING START, select it and press ENTER. Then  
go on to step 3.  
For SETTING CANCEL, select it and press ENTER.  
The bass peak level setting is finished. Go on to the  
next setup.  
1~6  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
TUNING  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
4.Expert Setup  
3 Use the 2 3 buttons to adjust the  
test tones and specify the bass peak  
level.  
1
2
3
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level]  
[3. D-Range Control]  
[4. Multi-Ch In Select]  
[5. Function Rename]  
[6. Multi-Room Setting]  
1 Raise the level gradually.  
2 Set the bass peak level at the point just before the  
tone starts to distort.  
Be careful! Test tones play back at loud volumes .  
Make sure there are no infants or small children in  
the room at distortion level.  
[Return]  
4.2. Bass Peak Level  
Manager  
[Setting Start]  
[Setting Cancel]  
If the YES or PLUS setting on the subwoofer is  
selected the test tone will only play back from the  
subwoofer. If not, the test tone will play back from all  
speakers set to LARGE except for the subwoofer.  
[Return]  
Please Wait  
4 Press ENTER.  
4.2. Bass Peak Level  
Manager  
The display on the receiver will show RESUME and the  
MASTER VOLUME will return to its original position.  
[Setting OK]  
Bass Peak Level  
[–80]  
5 If you want to continue EXPERT  
SETUP use the 5∞ buttons to select  
the next setup and press ENTER.  
Go on to the next page.  
[Setting Cancel]  
If you set the THX Ultra2 feature to  
YES on p.96 the BASS PEAK LEVEL  
feature will be cancelled.  
memo  
6 If you want to finish EXPERT SETUP  
use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER. Then use  
the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL  
This feature makes it possible to enjoy full surround sound effects on Dolby Digital sources even at low  
volumes. It does this by compressing the dynamic range. Dynamic range is the difference between the loudest  
and the softest sounds in any given signal. Compressing the range plays sounds so the quieter ones are audible  
and the louder ones dont get distorted or become overpowering. This feature only applies to Dolby Digital  
sources but the MIDNIGHT LISTENING mode (explained on p.51) accomplishes the same end for a variety of  
sources. If continuing from BASS PEAK LEVEL, DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL should be selected.  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 90, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
1 D-RANGE CONTROL should be  
SETUP  
selected, if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press ENTER.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
2 Use the 2 3 buttons to choose  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
either OFF, MID or MAX.  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
OFF: No Dynamic Range Control.  
MID: A moderate amount of Dynamic Range Control.  
MAX: The most Dynamic Range Control available is  
applied.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~5  
RETURN  
RETURN. Press ENTER.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
Dynamic Range Control is set. Go on to the next  
setting.  
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Start over from step one.  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
DTV MENU CLASS  
7
¡
STATION  
STATION  
+
4
CHANNEL–  
¢
CHANNEL+  
You may need to experiment with different Dolby  
Digital sources before you can use the DYNAMIC  
RANGE CONTROL setting to suit your low volume  
listening needs.  
4.Expert Setup  
1
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level]  
[3. D-Range Control]  
[4. Multi-Ch In Select]  
[5. Function Rename]  
[6. Multi-Room Setting]  
4 If you want to continue EXPERT  
SETUP use the 5∞ buttons to select  
the next setup and press ENTER.  
[Return]  
5 If you want to finish EXPERT SETUP  
use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER. Then use  
the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
3.3. Dynamic Range  
Control  
Dolby Digital  
dts  
[MID]  
[OFF]  
[Return]  
If you are listening at loud volumes we recom-  
mend turning the DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL  
OFF.  
memo  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
MULTI CH IN SELECT  
If you have two surround back speakers, and connected a source, such as a DVD-Audio player, to the analog  
multi-channel inputs, you can use this setting to control how the surround and surround back channels are  
routed. This will allow you to make the most of your speaker system, enabling you to play 5.1 channel  
sources through all of your speakers.  
There are three OUTPUT MODE settings:  
THROUGH: The surround channels are played through the surround speakers; the surround back channels  
are played through the surround back speaker(s).  
S =SB: The surround channels are played through the surround back speakers only.  
S=S & SB: The surround channels are played through the surround and surround back speakers. We  
recommend this setting for 5.1 channel soundtracks.  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 90, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
SETUP  
1 MULTI-CH IN SELECT should be  
selected if it isnt use the 5∞ buttons  
to select it. Press ENTER.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
2 Use the 2 3 buttons to choose a type  
of output mode: THROUGH, S =SB,  
S=S & SB.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select RETURN.  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
Press ENTER button.  
1~5  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
Your MULTI CH IN SELECT output set. Next, move on to  
FUNCTION RENAME, if necessary.  
EXTRA MENU  
8
If you want to change a setting before proceeding  
Start over from step one.  
4.Expert Setup  
1
2
3
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level]  
[3. D-Range Control]  
[4. Multi-Ch In Select]  
[5. Function Rename]  
[6. Multi-Room Setting]  
4 If you want to continue EXPERT SETUP  
use the 5∞ buttons to select the next  
setup and press ENTER.  
[Return]  
5 If you want to finish EXPERT SETUP  
use the 5∞ buttons to select RETURN  
and press ENTER. Then use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
3.4. Multi-Ch In Select  
Output Mode  
[Through]  
[Return]  
memo  
For details on speaker placement  
in this mode see page 103.  
3.4. Multi-Ch In Select  
Output Mode  
If you select S=SB or S=S & SB,  
the surround back MULTI CH IN  
jacks are switched off.  
[
S
SB ]  
[Return]  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
FUNCTION RENAME  
Use the FUNCTION RENAME capability to rename the display on the receiver and your OSD for different  
functions (DVD, etc.). For example, you could rename VCR1/DVR as "DVR-7000".  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 90, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
1 FUNCTION RENAME should be  
selected if it isnt use the 5∞  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~7  
RETURN  
buttons to select it. Press ENTER.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
name of the function (for example,  
VCR1/DVR) you want to change.  
Press ENTER.  
4.Expert Setup  
1
2
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level]  
[3. D-Range Control]  
[4. Multi-Ch In Select]  
[5. Function Rename]  
[6. Multi-Room Setting]  
The functions are divided into three different on-screen  
displays so you may have to move through them to  
find the function you want to rename.  
[Return]  
3 Use the 2 3 buttons to move the  
cursor around and use the 5∞  
buttons to enter a letter, number or  
symbol.  
4.5. Function Rename  
DVD/LD  
[
DVD/LD  
]
DVD/LD  
TV  
SAT  
[
[
[
DVD/LD  
TV  
SAT  
]
]
]
The possible selections are shown below.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
3.5. Function Rename  
3
4
VCR1/DVR  
[
VCR1/DVR  
]
!#$%&()*+,./:;<=>?@[ \ ]ˆ_{|} [space]  
VIDEO  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
[
[
[
VIDEO  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
]
]
]
4 Repeat step 3 until you get the name  
as you want it.  
You can input up to ten characters.  
3.5. Function Rename  
VCR1/DVR  
[
DVR-7000  
]
5 Press ENTER. The new function  
name is set.  
VIDEO  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
[
[
[
VIDEO  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
]
]
]
6 Repeat steps 2-5 to change other  
function names. Use the 5∞ buttons  
to select RETURN and press ENTER.  
3.5. Function Rename  
6
CD  
[
CD  
]
7 To finish EXPERT SETUP use the 5∞  
buttons to select RETURN and press  
ENTER. Then use the 5∞ buttons to  
select EXIT and press ENTER.  
CD  
[
CD  
]
CD-R  
TUNER  
PHONO  
[ CD-R/TAPE1 ]  
[
[
TUNER  
PHONO  
]
]
[Return]  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
THX Audio Setup  
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Setup  
If you have a high-precision speaker that outputs very low frequencies, the sound may have too much boom  
because of the resonant frequencies in the room where your subwoofer is setup. If you have this problem use  
the THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Setup to adjust the low end sounds.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your TV,  
SETUP  
press the RECEIVER on the remote  
control.  
Make sure your TV is set to the receiver.  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
The menu possibilities appear on your TV.  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
1
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select THX  
5
6
7
8
TONE  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
AUDIO SETUP. Press ENTER.  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
2
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
3~9  
RETURN  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
ULTRA2 SW SETUP. Press ENTER.  
EXTRA MENU  
8
+
5 If your subwoofer is THX Ultra2  
certified, select YES. Use the 23  
buttons and then press .  
System Setup  
3
[1. Auto Surround Setup ]  
[2. Input Assign ]  
[3. Surround Setup]  
[4. Expert Setup]  
If your subwoofer isn't THX Ultra2 certified, but you  
still want to switch the boundary gain compensation to  
ON, select YES. However, the results may not be  
satisfactory.  
[5. THX Audio Setup]  
[Exit]  
6 Use the 23 buttons to select ON or  
4.THX Audio Setup  
OFF.  
4
5
[ 1.Ultra2 SW Setup ]  
[ 2.SurBack SP Position ]  
[ 3.Re-Equalization ]  
7 Use to select RETURN then press  
[Return]  
ENTER.  
8 If you want to continue THX AUDIO  
SETUP use the 5∞ buttons to select  
the next setup and press ENTER.  
Go on to the next page.  
4.1. Ultra2 SW Setup  
THX Ultra2 SW?  
[ YES ]  
Boundary Gain  
Compensation  
[OFF]  
9 If you want to finish THX AUDIO  
SETUP use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER. Then use  
the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
[Return]  
4.1. Ultra2 SW Setup  
6,7  
THX Ultra2 SW?  
[ YES ]  
Boundary Gain  
Compensation  
[ OFF ]  
memo  
If you select YES the BASS PEAL LEVEL limiter  
(see p.92) will be cancelled.  
[Return]  
See the THX section in Techno Tidbits (p.100-  
101) for more information on the THX Ultra2  
Subwoofer feature.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
Surround Back Speaker Position  
This setting has been specifically designed to set the distance between your surround back speakers. If you  
don't have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won't be able to select this setting. The Advanced  
Speaker Array (ASA) system was developed with the principles of THX Ultra2 technology in order to get  
optimum sound from your surround back speakers. Choose whether your speakers are closer or further apart  
than 4 feet. To optimize the ASA technology closer together is better than farther apart. For more information  
about ASA see page 101 and for THX speaker placement information see p.103.  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 96, if necessary, to get to the  
starting point mentioned here.  
SETUP  
1 SURBACK SP POSITION should be  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
selected, if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it, and press  
ENTER.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
TAPE  
4
2 Use the 2 3 buttons to select either  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
APART or TOGETHER.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~5  
RETURN  
RETURN and press ENTER.  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
BAND  
TUNING  
TUNING  
+
1
3
¡
STAT ON  
DTV MENU CLASS  
STAT ON  
+
4 If you want to continue THX AUDIO  
SETUP use the 5∞ buttons to select  
the next setup and press ENTER.  
Go on to the next page.  
4.THX Audio Setup  
1
2
[ 1.Ultra2 SW Setup ]  
[ 2.SurBack SP Position ]  
[ 3.Re-Equalization ]  
5 If you want to finish THX AUDIO  
SETUP use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RETURN and press ENTER. Then use  
the 5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
[Return]  
4.2. SurBack SP Position  
SBL - SBR  
[ APART ]  
>= 4 f t  
SBL  
SBR  
[Return]  
4.2. SurBack SP Position  
SBL - SBR  
[ TOGETHER ]  
<
4 f t  
SBL SBR  
[Return]  
4.2. SurBack SP Position  
3
SBL - SBR  
[ APART ]  
>= 4 f t  
SBL  
SBR  
[Return]  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
Re-Equalization  
Re-Equalization is a built-in feature of THX technology (see p.101) and is thus always in use for HOME THX  
modes. If you want to apply this feature to other listening modes complete the steps below. Whether this  
setting will benefit you or not depends on the type of room you have and your individual listening tastes.  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 96, if necessary, to get to  
the starting point mentioned here.  
SETUP  
1 RE-EQUALIZATION should be  
S0URCE  
DVD/LD  
TV  
TV  
SYSTEM RECEIVER  
OFF  
selected if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it.  
SAT  
TV CONT  
MULTI CONTROL  
VCR1/  
MULTI  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
DVR  
OPERATION  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
2 Use the ∞5 buttons to select  
DIMMER  
INPUT ATT  
LOUDNESS SPEAKER A/B  
1
2
3
4
STANDARD or STEREO.  
VIDEO SEL  
SIGNAL SEL  
TAPE  
2
EFFECT/CH SELL  
5
TONE  
6
7
8
You should choose the listening mode that you would  
use for listening to movies or other sources that  
would generally be played in a large theater.  
BASS/TREBLE  
+
+10  
DISC  
ENTER  
9
0
DIRECT ACCESS DISP MODE  
REMOTE SETUP  
SYSTEM SETUP  
MENU  
TUNER EDIT  
ENTER  
STATUS  
GUIDE  
EXIT  
1~5  
RETURN  
3 Use the 2 3 buttons to select ON  
MPX  
DTV ON/OFF  
EXTRA MENU  
8
for the mode(s) you specified above.  
Selecting STANDARD ON will also apply  
Re-Equalization to the ADVANCED CINEMA listening  
modes.  
4.THX Audio Setup  
1
2
[ 1.Ultra2 SW Setup ]  
[ 2.SurBack SP Position ]  
[ 3.Re-Equalization ]  
4 Select RETURN (use ∞5) to go back  
to the THX AUDIO SETUP menu,  
and press ENTER.  
[Return]  
4.3 . Re-Equalization  
5 To finish THX AUDIO SETUP use the  
5∞ buttons to select RETURN and  
press ENTER. Then use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
HOME THX  
:ON  
except THX MUSICMODE  
STANDARD  
STEREO  
[OFF]  
[OFF]  
[Return]  
4.3. Re-Equalization  
3
HOME THX  
except THX MUSICMODE  
:ON  
STANDARD  
STEREO  
[ON]  
[OFF]  
memo  
If you set this feature on you won't be able to get  
96 kHz processing.  
[Return]  
4.3. Re-Equalization  
4
5
HOME THX :ON  
except THX MUSICMODE  
STANDARD  
STEREO  
[ON]  
[OFF]  
[Return]  
System Setup  
[Auto Surround Setup]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
98  
[Exit]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Dolby  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a discrete digital surround format used for multichannel surround sound. It was developed after  
the Dolby Surround System and Dolby Pro Logic Surround System. Dolby Digital is a high quality digital sound  
format that is used by many theatrical film releases.  
Soundtracks using linear PCM audio generate too much  
data for multichannel use. Dolby Digital technology was  
developed in response to the need for efficient  
4 channel analog  
5.1 channel  
multichannel digital sound. It uses masking technology and  
Adaptive Transform Coding, resulting in no audible loss of  
sound quality. In the present age of digital sound Dolby  
Digital is a standard audio format for DVD and has been  
adopted by HDTV broadcasts throughout the USA.  
Other features include:  
1) Downmixing on playback for compatibility with mono,  
stereo, Dolby Pro Logic and 5.1 channel audio.  
2) A wide range of bitrates and channels.  
3) Decoding dynamic range information and adjusting the  
dialog level in the soundtrack (called Dialog Normalization,  
see below for more information).  
Dolby  
Digital  
Dolby Digital for movie  
The advantages of the Dolby Digital system of encoding  
allow it to maintain its high quality sound while at the same  
time being very flexible, with the ability to handle many  
different types of soundtracks.  
Dialog Normalization  
When a Dolby Digital soundtrack is played back the Dialog Normalization function of the receiver activates auto-  
matically. Dialog Normalization is a Dolby Digital function that establishes the average dialog level for the program  
source being played. If the receiver's level does not match the average dialog level, first you see "DIAL NORM" and  
"OFFSET +4 dB" (as an example) appear in the receiver's display. In this example, the number +4 dB is the differ-  
ence between the receiver's gain structure and the Dolby Digital average dialog level. To match the average dialog  
level, subtract or add the OFFSET level. For example, if the OFFSET level is +4 dB, the amplifier's output is 4 dB  
over the average recorded level.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved version of Dolby Pro Logic technology with extended matrix decoding  
technology that can create 5.1 channel sound from two channel sources. Dolby Pro Logic II creates basic 5  
channel sound by using the innovative "steering logic" circuit. Therefore when listening to typical two-channel  
sources like CD, the listener can enjoy a richer spatial effect. When using software encoded with Dolby  
Surround, this decoding system affords the listener an improved surround experience with greater sound detail.  
Chart Comparing Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Pro Logic II  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic II  
Effective sound source  
Dolby Surround encoded sources  
All two channel stereo sources  
Surround Sound  
Frequency Range  
Mono  
Stereo  
Surround within 7kHz  
All Channels/Full Range  
This unit has a three Dolby Pro Logic II functions. The first is "Movie Mode" (suitable for film soundtracks);  
"Music Mode" (suitable for music); "Pro Logic Mode" (this mode is less sensitive to the quality of the source  
material, so may be useful when Movie Mode or Music Mode do not give good results). One can select one of  
them depending on your soundtrack of choice.  
99  
memo  
• For receivers and components other than the VSX-47TX Dolby Pro Logic II may not have the above  
mentioned functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
This new recording technology is able to play 6.1 channel sound and was developed in a collaboration between  
Dolby Laboratories and Lucasfilm, Ltd. for the film "Stars Wars: The First Episode", the first movie ever to be  
made with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology. In a movie theater this format affords the listener vivid  
surround sound experience replete with the effect of sounds flying overhead, even for those seated towards the  
sides of the theater.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX contains surround back channels which are dubbed into the soundtrack in studio. The  
channels are encoded into the left and right channels of the soundtrack so this format can be compatible with  
Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding. For a list of movies that contain Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks see  
Dolby website at: http://www.dolby.com  
THX Surround EX technology was developed for movie theater use originally but has been extended for home  
theater use and consumers can no benefit from this excellent, realistic sound format. (For more details see "THX  
Surround EX" on the next page.) This unit is equipped with a THX Surround EX decoder.  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS has been adopted as a sound recording format in the movie theaters since the release of JURASSIC  
PARKin 1993, and has a good reputation for high quality sound and dynamic surround effects.  
In this system, 6 channels of digital sound are recorded on CD-ROM. DTS adopts a simultaneous playback  
format. With a low rate of compression of sound signals and a high rate of transmittance, a higher sound quality  
format is produced. For this reason, the format is being introduced in more and more movie theaters, and is  
being adopted for home use as DTS Digital Surround. When used with movies it's called DTS-LD DVD and for  
music software (5.1 channel CD) as DTS-CD .  
DTS-ES  
DTS launched a new surround format in November 2000. This has come to be known as DTS Extended  
Surround or simply DTS-ES. The technology has been advanced to include two new home formats DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1 format, and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ch format, both are able to playback discrete, 6.1-channel content  
from DVDs and CDs. Both of these formats are compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 ch decoder. In this  
system each channel is encoded and decoded individually, adding to the separation of the channels. Since DTS  
adds a third surround channel, the surround back channel, the realism and all-encompassing nature of the sound  
reaches levels not seen before in home theater. This unit is equipped with a DTS-ES decoder.  
DTS Neo:6  
This is a matrix decoding technology that transforms two-channel sources into 6.0 channel surround sound.  
There are two modes, "Cinema Mode" and "Music Mode".  
DTS 96/24  
This high-quality format will be used for software which will be available from November, 2001. For compatibility  
with equipment that was produced before this format was made, DVD players can play this software using a  
conventional DTS 5.1ch decoder. This unit is equipped with a DTS 96 kHz/24 bit decoder to take advantage of  
the higher sound quality available.  
THX  
THX Cinema™ processing :THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film  
production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas' personal desire to make your experience of the film  
soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home theater, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.  
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie  
theaters with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape,  
DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment.  
THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into  
the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are  
automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Re-Equalization: The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio  
equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very  
different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a  
small home environment.  
Timbre Matching: The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is  
coming. In a movie theater, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a  
home theater, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the  
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming  
from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.  
Adaptive Decorrelation: In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround  
sound experience, but in a home theater there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound  
like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as  
you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates--with only two  
speakers--the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater.  
THX Ultra:Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra certified, it must incorporate all the features above and  
also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra logo, which is your  
guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Ultra  
requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other  
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.  
THX Surround EX:THX Surround EX-Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX  
division of Lucasfilm Ltd.  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce  
an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds  
behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and  
subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings  
more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before.  
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market  
may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby  
web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at  
www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,  
faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and  
may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.  
Advanced Speaker Array(ASA): When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left,  
Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) and the two  
Surround Back speakers are placed close together as shown in the diagram on page 103, you can take advantage of  
THX's Advanced Speaker Array (ASA) technology.  
ASA optimizes the surround sound experience using two new modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema and THX MusicMode.  
THX Ultra2Cinema mode: When presented with a multichannel digital signal (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) the VSX-47TX  
automatically selects THX Ultra2 Cinema mode. This mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible  
movie watching experience. In this mode ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers  
providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds.  
THX's ASA circuitry will automatically detect DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded  
soundtracks for correct playback using all 8 speakers.  
Please note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows ASA to switch  
automatically. Therefore, if you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you may manually  
select the THX Surround EX playback mode.  
THX MusicMode: On some music DVDs the surround sounds are mixed quite differently than surround sounds mixed for  
movie soundtracks. ASA technology optimizes the play back of 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS and Dolby Digital.  
Using all 8 speakers the THX MusicMode provides a wide stable rear soundstage, placing surround sounds best suited for  
music playback.  
Boundary Gain Compensation: Room boundaries (walls) or other characteristics (such as wall construction) may  
increase the perceived acoustics levels at low frequencies. Depending on the listeners and the subwoofers position,  
the listener may experience an excessive bass effect. The purpose of this feature is to compensate for excessive bass  
resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to  
THX Ultra2 specifications. If not used with a THX certified Ultra2 subwoofer then this feature will not operate correctly  
and its operation will be unpredictable. In the THX Audio setup menu choose Ultra2 SW Setup. Then choose THX  
Ultra2 Subwoofer-Yes. This now allows you to operate the Boundary Gain Compensation feature. Once you have set  
up the speaker system, play some program material with familiar bass content. If you are close to a boundary you may  
decide to switch the Boundary Gain Compensation feature ON if you feel that the bass sound excessive. Please also  
note that when a THX certified Ultra2 subwoofer is used, the Bass Limiting protection feature is disabled in this product  
as protection is provided by the subwoofer.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Speaker Placement Information  
Placement of your speakers is a crucial aspect of attaining accurate and realistic surround sound.  
Certain pointers concerning speakers stands, direction, angle and distance of speakers will be useful  
in this regard.  
Firstly, it is best not to put your speakers directly on the floor. If you do this some of the sound vibra-  
tion (especially bass) will go directly into the flooring and be lost. Instead we recommend using ex-  
tremely hard objects (like cinder blocks) or designated speaker stands to support your speakers. Avoid  
placing the speakers on soft (like cushions or sofas) as these will also lead to sound loss and unstable  
surfaces (like flimsy shelving) as they may cause speaker accidents. In order to achieve a surround  
sound effect, make sure the speakers are a reasonable distance from your main listening position.  
Follow the diagrams and instructions below for optimum placement of each set of speakers.  
C
C
F R  
C
F L  
F R  
F L  
F R  
F L  
45~60  
It is best to angle the speakers  
towards the listening position.  
The angle depends on the size  
of the room. Use less angle for  
bigger rooms.  
If you're using a CENTER speaker  
set the FRONT speakers to a wider  
angle. If not, set them to a narrower  
angle.  
Make sure the CENTER speaker  
does not cross the forward plane  
of the FRONT speakers.  
90~120  
90~120  
S R  
S L  
S R  
S R  
S R  
S L  
S L  
0~60  
S L  
S L  
S R  
S B  
SBL  
SBL SBR  
SBR  
Surround speakers should be  
positioned a foot and a half to three  
feet (60 cm -1 meter) higher than  
Surround back speakers should also be positioned a foot and a half to  
three feet (60 cm -1 meter) higher than your ears and titled slight  
downward. Make sure the speakers don't face each other. For DVD  
your ears and titled slight downward. Audio the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for  
Make sure the speakers don't face  
each other. For DVD Audio the  
speakers should be more directly  
behind the listener than for home  
theater playback.  
home theater playback.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Speaker Placement for a Complete THX Speaker System  
If you have a complete THX Speaker System set (LucasFilm authorized), follow the diagram below to  
place your speakers. Placing your surround back speakers together, and the same distance from the  
listening position, will allow you to take advantage of the ASA technology (see p.97 & 101).  
Notice the surround speakers should output at an angle parallel to the listener. Also, notice the angle  
of the front speakers.  
FL  
C
FR  
Di-polar Radiating Speaker  
SL  
SR  
Surround  
Surround  
SBL  
SBR  
Surround Back  
50˚  
100˚  
Speaker Placement for DVD-Audio (etc.) Sources  
The best speaker placement for DVD-Audio (and other  
multichannel music sources) may be different than for  
regular DVD discs. For these formats follow the diagram  
at right as opposed to the home theater setups of the pre-  
ceding pages. If you want to use both home theater and  
DVD-Audio discs follow the diagrams below and set up  
your MULTI CH IN SELECT output mode accordingly.  
In order to choose the best MULTI CH IN SELECT output mode (see p.94) use the diagrams here. Find  
the diagram that most closely resembles your surround and surround back speaker setup and then  
chose that output mode.  
[S=S&SB]  
[S=SB]  
[Through]  
S R  
S L  
S R  
S L  
Virtual sound  
Virtual sound  
SBL  
SBR  
SBL  
SBR  
In this diagram the white sound  
waves represent the actual trans-  
mitted sound and the shaded  
sound waves represent the how the  
sound will seem to the listener (the  
virtual sound).  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Audio Block Diagram  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
Power  
The power does not turn on.  
The power plug is disconnected.  
The protection circuit may have been  
activated.  
Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.  
Disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet, and insert again.  
The unit does not respond  
when the buttons are  
pressed.  
Static electricity caused by dry air.  
Switch the unit off, then on again.  
Disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet, and insert again.  
During operation, the unit  
suddenly switches off.  
The speaker wires are frayed or sticking  
out of the jack, and are touching the back of  
the receiver or another set of wires.  
Reinsert the speaker wires, making sure  
there are no stray strands of wire and that  
they are inserted fully (see p.25)  
AMP ERR blinks in the  
display and the unit turns  
off.  
The receiver probably has a serious  
problem.  
You wont be able to operate the receiver  
for a minute. After that turn the receiver  
back on. If you have the same problem  
again call a Pioneer-accredited repair center.  
OVERHEAT blinks in the  
display and no sound is  
output.  
The receiver has gotten too hot.  
Turn the receiver off and allow it to cool  
down with good ventilation. It is very likely  
that you have a heat dispersal and ventilation  
problem so please follow the instructions in  
Installing the Receiver(p.8 ) carefully.  
Setup  
The setup screen doesn't  
appear.  
The output jacks haven't been connected  
properly.  
The MONITOR OUT jack haven't been  
connected.  
Check all connections (see p.16-23).  
Connect the MONITOR OUT jacks to the  
TV monitor (see p.16).  
Every time Auto Surround  
Sound Setup is attempted,  
there is some kind of error, or  
the settings seem incorrect.  
The room environment is not optimal for  
auto setup (too much ambient noise,  
obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone, etc.)  
Make sure the room environment is in  
line with the guidelines displayed on the  
OSD during auto setup (see p.13-14, memo  
p.15, & 36-37).  
The LARGE and SMALL  
settings for speakers after  
the Auto Surround Sound  
Setup are incorrect.  
There are other frequencies in the room  
that are affecting the auto setup.  
Check for household appliances (air  
conditioner, fan, etc.) that may be affecting  
the environment and switch them off if  
necessary.  
After the proper settings  
have been made, there still  
seems to be something  
wrong with the sound.  
The speakers have been incorrectly  
connected (+/- connections are reversed).  
Check all connections (see p.25).  
No audio  
No sound is output when a  
function is selected.  
Improper connections.  
Make sure the component is connected  
correctly (see p.16-26).  
Sound is muted.  
Press MUTING on the remote control.  
Adjust MASTER VOLUME.  
The volume is turned down.  
The TAPE 2 MONITOR is on.  
Speakers are turned off.  
Turn TAPE 2 MONITOR off (see p.54).  
Press SPEAKERS (A/B) to select the  
speakers you connected (see p.71).  
Select the proper signal with the SIGNAL  
SELECT button (see p.45).  
DIGITAL/ANALOG setting is incorrect.  
MULTI CH IN mode is on.  
Turn MULTI CH IN mode off (see p.53).  
No sound output from the  
front speakers.  
The U-shaped connectors that connect  
the POWER AMP IN terminals to the front  
channel pre outs are not connected.  
The front speakers are connected to the  
B speaker system jack.  
Connect the POWER AMP IN terminals  
to the front channel pre outs using the  
supplied U-shaped connectors (see p.30).  
Connect the front speakers to the A  
speaker system jacks (see p.25).  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
No sound from surround or  
center speakers.  
Speaker system B or AB is selected  
Select the A speaker system (see p.71).  
See SPEAKER SYSTEMSon p.36-37  
to check the speaker settings.  
Speaker settings are incorrect.  
The surround and/or center speakers are  
disconnected.  
The listening mode is STEREO.  
Connect the speakers (see p.25).  
Choose a surround listening mode (see p.43).  
No sound output from the  
subwoofer.  
The subwoofer setting is NO.  
The subwoofer output setting is too  
small.  
Change the setting to YES or PLUS (see p.35-37).  
Adjust the output setting to the level you  
want see p.92).  
Adjust the peak level setting to the level  
you want.  
Change your subwoofer setting to one of  
the following (see p.35-37):  
The bass peak level setting is too low.  
There is very little low frequency  
information in your source.  
Front: SMALL Subwoofer:YES  
Front:LARGE Subwoofer:PLUS  
Raise the frequency level to match your  
speakers' playback characteristics.  
Check the three following points:  
Check the power.  
The crossover frequency is set too low.  
There is a problem with the subwoofer.  
Check the subwoofer volume control .  
Check the subwoofer hasn't  
automatically switched to standby mode  
(check the subwoofer manual)  
Check all connections.  
The subwoofer isn't connected properly.  
No sound output from the  
surround back speakers.  
The LISTENING CH SELECT is set to 5.1  
channel playback.  
The source is not a 6.1 channel playback  
source.  
The speaker system setting is on FRONT  
BI-AMP 5.1 or the surround back speaker  
setting is NO.  
Choose 7.1 channel playback (see p.44).  
Choose 7.1 channel playback or choose one of  
the ADVANCED listening modes (see p.43 & 44).  
Choose NORMAL SURROUND, adjust  
the surround back channel setting  
according to the number of speakers you're  
using, and then set LISTENING CH SELECT  
to 7.1 (see p.35-37, 44).  
The surround back speakers aren't  
connected properly.  
The surround back channel is set to 1  
speaker setting only, and the speaker is  
connected to the right channel output.  
Check all connections (see p.16-23).  
Connect the speaker to the surround  
back left channel output (see p.25).  
No sound output from one  
speaker.  
The speaker system setting is NO.  
Change the speaker setting to YES (see  
p.35-37).  
The speaker isn't connected properly.  
The source has no sound output for that  
channel.  
Check all connections.  
If you choose one of the ADVANCED  
listening modes, an extra channel may be  
created for the speaker (see p.43).  
Increase the speaker output level.  
The speaker output level is set too small.  
Sound is produced from  
some components, but not  
from digital components.  
SIGNAL SELECT is set incorrectly.  
Set SIGNAL SELECT to AUTOor  
according to the type of connections made  
(see p.45).  
The digital inputs are assigned  
incorrectly, or not at all.  
Set the digital input settings correctly  
(see p.12, memo on 17, 23, and especially  
88).  
The digital components aren't connected  
properly.  
The player is not compatible with the  
source you're using, or the player settings  
are incorrect.  
Check all connections.  
Choose a compatible source, or check  
the player's manual for the correct settings.  
The TAPE 2 MONITOR is on, or MULTI  
CH IN mode has been selected.  
Switch the TAPE 2 MONITOR off (see  
p.54), or choose one of the listening modes  
(see p.43). The MULTI CH IN switches off  
automatically.  
The digital output level has been turned  
down on a CD player or other component  
equipped with digital output level  
adjustment capability.  
Set the digital volume level of the player  
to full, or to the neutral position.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Remedy  
Symptom  
Cause  
When playing an LD the  
SIGNAL SELECT is on 2 RF  
but there is still no sound.  
The LD is not a Dolby Digital compatible  
disc.  
Set the SIGNAL SELECT to AUTO (see  
p.45). Make sure your LD player is hooked  
up with analog connections in addition to  
digital and 2 RF connections (see p.17, 22).  
Other audio problems  
Subwoofer output is very  
low.  
Settings route signal away from  
subwoofer.  
To get more signal to the subwoofer set  
it to PLUS or choose SMALL for the front  
speakers (see p.36-37).  
During multi channel  
playback, there is no sound  
output from one speaker.  
The MULTI CH IN SELECT is not set  
correctly.  
That speaker is set to NO (except  
center).  
Select the correct number of input  
channels (see p.94).  
Set the speaker to YES.  
During multi channel  
playback, the only sound  
output is from the front  
speakers.  
2 channel input is selected.  
Set the MULTI CHANNEL IN playback to  
8 channel (see p.53).  
A multi channel DVD source  
appears to be downmixed  
from 2 channels during  
playback.  
The source is coming from something  
other than the MULTI CH IN jacks (for  
example, digital PCM output, etc.)  
Check the MULTI CH IN connection (see  
p.21) and select the type of playback with  
the MULTI CH IN button (see p.53).  
The OVER indicator is  
constantly lit.  
If you are using an analog source, the  
signal is too strong.  
Press the INPUT ATT button (see p.54).  
If the player has an analog output setting,  
lower it as necessary.  
Considerable noise in radio  
broadcasts.  
Incorrect frequency.  
Tune in the correct frequency.  
The antenna is not connected.  
Connect the antenna (see p.24).  
Route 2 RF and digital cables away  
from the antenna terminals and wires.  
2 RF and/or digital cables are near the  
antenna terminals and wires.  
Broadcast stations cannot  
be selected automatically.  
The antenna is poorly positioned.  
Adjust the direction and position for best  
reception.  
Interference caused by other equipment  
(fluorescent lamp, motor, etc.).  
Turn off the equipment causing the noise  
or move it away from the receiver.  
Place the antenna farther away from the  
equipment causing the noise.  
Connect an outdoor AM or FM antenna  
(see p.24).  
Weak radio signals.  
Noise or hum can be heard  
even when there is no sound  
being input.  
There is electrical interference from  
another component or appliance.  
Check that personal computers or other  
digital components connected to the same  
power source are not causing interference.  
When a search is performed  
by a DTS compatible CD  
player during playback,  
noise is output.  
The search function performed by the  
player interferes with the reading of digital  
information.  
This is not a malfunction, but be sure to  
turn the volume down to prevent the output  
of loud noise from your speakers.  
When playing a DTS format  
LD there is noise audible on  
the soundtrack.  
The SIGNAL SELECT is on ANALOG.  
Set the SIGNAL SELECT to DIGITAL (see  
p.45).  
Can't record audio.  
You are trying to make an analog  
recording from a digital signal, or a digital  
recording of an analog source.  
You can only record analog to analog, or  
digital to digital.  
You can't record digital sources that have  
been copy protected.  
Check connections (see p.20 & 22).  
The digital source is copy protected.  
The jacks for recording have not been  
connected properly.  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity  
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
Video  
No image is output when a  
function is selected.  
Improper connections.  
Make sure the component is connected  
correctly (see p.16, 17-19).  
The input source is not properly selected.  
The video input selected on the TV  
monitor is incorrect.  
The TV or monitor is hooked up with cord  
that is different than that used for the video  
player.  
Press the correct function button.  
Please read the TV monitor manual and  
change the settings accordingly.  
Use the same cable to connect to your  
TV and all your video equipment (see p.16-  
23).  
The component video setting is  
incorrect.  
Select the correct C'NENT VIDEO IN  
setting (see p.89).  
There is no image coming  
from the selected  
component video jacks.  
The type of cord connected to the TV  
doesn't match your video input settings.  
Change the settings to match the cord  
connected (see p.16-23).  
The source is copy protected.  
You can't record sources that have been  
copy protected.  
Can't record video.  
You are trying to record a source  
connected to the component video jacks.  
The recorder's video input is hooked up  
using a different type of cord to the source  
video output.  
Connect the component with S video or  
composite video cords (see p.16-23).  
Hook up the source and the recorder  
using the same type of video cord.  
Input/display  
The display is dark.  
The display DIMMER button is pushed.  
Press DIMMER on the remote control  
repeatedly to return to the default setting  
(see p.56).  
You can't get DIGITAL to  
come up when using the  
SIGNAL SELECT button.  
Either the digital connections or the  
DIGITAL IN SELECT is incorrect.  
Tape 2 MONITOR is on.  
Make sure the digital connections (see  
p.17-19 & 22-23) and the DIGITAL IN  
SELECT (see p.88) is done correctly.  
Press the Tape 2 MONITOR button so it  
goes into the off setting (see p.54) .  
Turn MULTI CH IN mode off (see p.53) .  
MULTI CH IN mode is on.  
The digital format indicator  
doesn't light up even when  
playing a non-PCM digital  
source.  
The player is paused or stopped.  
There is a mistake in the player settings  
for audio output.  
Play the source.  
Fix the audio settings (check the manual  
that came with your DVD player).  
A compressed digital source  
is being played, but the  
digital format indicators  
don't light up.  
Although it's a non-PCM digital source  
there is a possibility the present track is not  
the proper format (5.1, 6.1, or 7.1 channel).  
There is no problem. The indicator won't  
light when the track is not a compressed  
digital source.  
During playback of a  
compressed digital source,  
the 2 PRO LOGIC or NEO:6  
indicators show in the  
display.  
The digital signal is not being sent with  
the source.  
The audio is in two channel format.  
It has already been Dolby surround  
encoded.  
Choose DIGITAL or AUTO with the signal  
select button (see p.45).  
This is not a malfunction. Check the  
manufacturer information for the source.  
During playback of a  
Surround EX or DTS ES  
source on the AUTO setting,  
the EX and ES indicators  
won't light.  
The source may be 6.1 playback  
compatible, but there is no signal from the  
source to indicate this.  
Switch the LISTENING CH SELECT to  
7.1 and switch to the THX Surround EX or  
Standard TX listening mode see p.43 & 44).  
During playback of a  
The listening mode is set incorrectly for  
the source.  
Switch the LISTENING CH SELECT to  
AUTO and select HOME THX or  
STANDARD listening modes (see p.43 &  
44).  
Switch the LISTENING CH SELECT to  
7.1 and switch to the THX Surround EX or  
Standard TX listening mode (see p.43 & 44).  
Surround EX or DTS ES  
source on the AUTO setting,  
the EX and ES indicators  
light, but the signal is not  
properly processed.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Remedy  
Symptom  
Cause  
During playback of a DVD  
audio source, the player  
shows a transfer rate of  
96kHz, but the receiver does  
not.  
The multi channel connections are  
analog, so there is no digital transfer.  
This is not a malfunction. See the  
player's manual for more details.  
During playback of a DTS  
96/24 source, the display  
doesn't show 96kHz  
The receiver may be on a different mode  
than STANDARD.  
One of the DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT,  
LOUDNESS, and TONE features are  
switched on.  
Switch to STANDARD mode (see p.43).  
Turn it/them off (see p.50-52).  
The setting for speakers other than the  
surround back is set to NO.  
Re-EQ is set on.  
The source has been downmixed to 48  
kHz.  
Set Re-EQ off (see p.98).  
During playback of a 96kHz  
source, the display doesn't  
show 96kHz  
The receiver may be on a different mode  
than STEREO.  
Switch to STEREO mode (see p.43).  
One of the DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT,  
LOUDNESS, and TONE features are  
switched on.  
Turn it/them off (see p.50-52).  
Re-EQ is set on.  
Set Re-EQ off (see p.98).  
Remote control  
Cannot be remote  
controlled.  
The remote control batteries have worn  
out.  
Replace the batteries (see p.7).  
Too far away or bad angle of operation.  
Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote  
sensor on the front panel (see p.8).  
Remove the obstacle or operate from  
another position (see p.8).  
Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the  
front panel to direct light.  
There is an obstacle between the  
receiver and the remote control.  
Strong light such as fluorescent light is  
shining onto the unit's remote control signal  
light-receiving window.  
A cord is connected to the CONTROL IN  
terminal on this unit.  
Connect cord to the correct jack.  
The IR -Receiver type is mismatched  
with the setting.  
Disconnect the IR Receiver from the rear  
panel, and set to the other IR Receiver type  
using the remote control.  
Other components can't be  
operated with the system  
remote.  
The preset code settings are wrong.  
The battery wore out and the system  
settings were cleared.  
Input the correct preset code.  
Reset the proper system settings.  
The SR cable is connected,  
but the connected  
The SR cable hasn't been connected  
properly.  
The rest of the component connection  
have not been made.  
The component you have hooked up is  
not SR compatible.  
Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it is  
the right jack (see p.78).  
Make sure an analog connection has  
been made between the units.  
This is not a malfunction.  
components can't be  
operated with the remote.  
Miscellaneous  
HOME THX 7.1 channel  
mode is selected, but there  
are certain options that can't  
be chosen.  
The current setting is for only one  
surround back speaker.  
Connect two surround back speakers and  
make the settings accordingly (see p.25,  
36-37).  
There seems to be a time lag  
between the speakers and  
the output of the subwoofer.  
The subwoofer channel can be delayed  
slightly if run through a low-pass filter.  
The MCACC system will automatically  
compensate for a delay in the subwoofer  
output during the Auto Surround Sound  
Setup.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Power cord CAUTION!  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord  
when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of  
furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The  
power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause  
a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your  
nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement.  
We Want You Listening For A  
Lifetime  
EIA  
EST 1924  
S
I
We  
Want You  
LISTENING  
For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will provide a  
lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from  
loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this  
manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound  
levels is included for your protection.  
Selectingfineaudioequipmentsuchastheunityou’ve  
justpurchasedisonlythestartofyourmusicalenjoyment.  
Now it’s time to consider how you can maximize the fun  
andexcitementyourequipment offers.Thismanufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your  
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the  
sound come through loud and clear without annoying  
blaring or distortion-and, most importantly, without  
affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30  
40  
Quiet library, soft whispers  
Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from  
traffic  
50  
60  
70  
80  
Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
Averagecitytraffic,garbagedisposals,alarmclock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound. So  
what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and harmful  
to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your  
equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE  
DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
90  
Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
Rockbandconcertinfrontofspeakers,thunderclap  
Gunshot blast, jet plane  
100  
120  
140  
180  
Once you have established a comfortable sound level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Rocket launching pad  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want  
you listening for a lifetime.  
EIA  
EST 1924  
S
We  
Want You  
I
O
LISTENING  
For A Lifetime  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem-solving  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity) .......................................... 1 Vp-p/75  
Output (Level/Impedance) ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio .............................................. 70 dB  
Frequency Response ..................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz dB  
Continuous average power output of  
160 watts* per channel, min., at 6  
ohms, from 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz with no  
more than 0.09 %** total harmonic  
distortion (front).  
Component Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity) .......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio .............................................. 70 dB  
Frequency Response ..................... 5 Hz to 40 MHz dB  
Continuous Power Output (6 )  
Front ....... 160 W + 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 6 )  
Center ................... 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 6 )  
Surround ..... 160 W + 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 6 )  
Surr. back .... 160 W + 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 6 )  
+0  
3  
FM Tuner Section  
Continuous Power Output ( 8 )  
Frequency Range ........................... 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity........ Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 )  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity .........................Mono: 20.2 dBf  
Stereo: 38.6 dBf  
Front ....... 130 W + 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 )  
Center ................... 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 )  
Surround ........... 130 W + 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 )  
Surr. back .......... 130 W + 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 )  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................... Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Distortion ........................................ Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity ................... 60 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation ........................................ 40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response ................. 30 Hz to 15 kHz ( 1) dB  
Antenna Input .........................................75 unbalanced  
Audio Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
PHONO MM.........................................4.7 mV/47 kΩ  
LINE.....................................................382 mV/47 kΩ  
Phono Overload level (T.H.D.0.1 %, 1kHz)  
PHONO MM ..................................................... 120 mV  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Response  
Frequency Range ............................ 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) ........................... 350 µV/m  
Selectivity ................................................................. 25 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB  
Antenna........................................................ Loop antenna  
PHONO MM .................... 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz 0.3 dB  
+0  
3  
LINE .......................................5 Hz to 100,000 Hz dB  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
LINE ...................................................... 382 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
Miscellaneous  
BASS ..................................................... 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE ................................................. 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS ........................... +4/+2 dB (100Hz/10 kHz)  
(at volume position -40dB)  
Power Requirements ............................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power Consumption ............................................... 710 W  
Power Consumption in Standby mode .................. 0.65 W  
AC Outlet  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
PHONO MM ........................................................ 86 dB  
LINE ................................................................... 105 dB  
SWITCHED......................................100 W (0.8 A) MAX  
Dimensions .................... 440 (W) × 203 (H) × 472 (D) mm  
(17-5/16 (W) × 8 (H) × 18-9/16 (D) in.)  
Weight (without package) ................... 28.3 kg (62 lb 4 oz)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
PHONO MM ........................................................ 83 dB  
LINE ..................................................................... 93 dB  
Furnished Parts  
FM wire Antenna .............................................................1  
AM Loop Antenna ........................................................... 1  
AAIEC LR6 batteries .................................................. 4  
Remote Control Unit ........................................................1  
Remote Control Cable .................................................... 1  
Remote Control Stand .................................................... 1  
U-shaped connectors .......................................................2  
AC Power Cord ............................................................... 1  
Operating Instructions .................................................... 1  
*
Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commissions  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for  
Amplifiers.  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer.  
Maintenance of External Surfaces  
Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust  
and dirt.  
When the surfaces are dirty, wipe with a soft  
cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five  
or six times with water, and wrung out well, and  
then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use  
furniture wax or cleaners.  
NOTE:  
Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays  
or other chemicals on or near this unit, since  
these will corrode the surfaces.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer  
Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement parts,  
operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below.  
8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4  
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Service  
Department at the above listed number for assistance.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC.  
CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT  
P.O. BOX 1760, LONG BEACH,  
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized  
Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.  
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Service Department at the following address:  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
Customer Service Department  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R  
OP2  
(905) 479-4411  
1-877-283-5901  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisée  
Pioneer au Canada pour obtenir le nom de la Société de Service Autorisée Pioneer le plus  
près de chez vous. Ou encore, veuillez vous communiquer avec le Service de Clientèle de  
Pioneer:  
Pioneer électroniques du Canada, Inc.  
Département de service au consommateurs  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R  
OP2  
(905) 479-4411  
1-877-283-5901  
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la  
Garantie Limitée gui accompagne le produit.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2001 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada  
PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
San Lorenzo 1009 3er Piso Desp. 302 Col. Del Valle Mexico D.F. C.P. 03100  
TEL: 5-688-52-90  
Printed in Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<TNGZF/01K00001>  
<ARB7250-A>  

Philips Computer Drive 50PF7320 User Manual
Philips Computer Monitor BDS4223V 27 User Manual
Philips Portable Radio AE4800 User Manual
Philips Universal Remote PM 4S 4 User Manual
Pioneer Speaker SP C22 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System DEH 2300 User Manual
Planar Personal Computer C3012T User Manual
Plantronics Bluetooth Headset M165 User Manual
Polar Heart Rate Monitor FT60G1BLK User Manual
PYLE Audio CD Player PLCD27 User Manual